ti
TI-73 Explorer™
Graphing Calculator Guidebook
In this guidebook, TI-73 refers to both the TI-73 and
TI-73 Explorer. All functions, instructions, and examples in
this guidebook work identically for both the TI-73 and the
TI-73 Explorer.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
© 1998, 2001–2003 Texas Instruments Incorporated
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
1
Preparing to Use Your TIN73.........................................3
The Home Screen...........................................................5
Entering Numbers and Other Characters.....................6
Functions and Instructions ..........................................12
Entering Expressions....................................................15
Retrieving Previous Entries - £......................17
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer - ¢......18
Mode Settings..............................................................22
Chapter 2: Math Operations
25
Keyboard Math Operations ........................................27
The 1 MATH Menu ................................................34
The 1 NUM Menu ..................................................44
The 1 PRB Menu ....................................................49
The 1 LOG Menu....................................................54
Chapter 3: Fractions
57
Entering Fractions........................................................58
Using Fractions in Calculations ...................................59
Fraction Modes ............................................................60
Converting between Fractions and Decimals.............64
Converting between Mixed Numbers and
Simple Fractions......................................................65
Chapter 4: Measurement Conversions and
Constant Calculations
67
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu.......................68
Constants......................................................................71
Chapter 5: Lists
77
Steps for Creating a List ..............................................78
The List Editor 3 ....................................................79
Naming a List ...............................................................79
Entering List Elements.................................................81
Editing Lists in the List Editor......................................87
The - v Ls Menu .................................................91
The - v OPS Menu..............................................92
List Commands from the Home Screen ....................102
iv TIN73 Table of Contents
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
107
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot ................................... 108
Defining Statistical Data in Lists ............................... 109
Deselecting Yn Functions .......................................... 109
Defining a Stat Plot................................................... 109
Selecting Stat Plot Types........................................... 111
Defining Stat Plot Options........................................ 112
Adjusting Window Values and Format.................... 114
Displaying the Stat Plot............................................. 114
Stat Plot Examples..................................................... 114
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
127
The - v MATH Menu........................................ 128
The - v CALC Menu.......................................... 133
Chapter 8: Tables
149
What Is a Table? ........................................................ 150
Steps for Creating a Table ........................................ 151
Defining and Selecting Functions in the
Y= Editor &........................................................ 152
Setting Up the Table - f ............................ 153
Displaying the Table - i............................... 154
Table Setup from the Home Screen ......................... 161
Chapter 9: Function Graphing
163
Steps for Graphing a Function.................................. 164
Example of Function Graphing................................. 165
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor & ................. 167
Selecting a Graph Style ............................................. 169
Setting the Window Format - g................ 171
Defining Window Values.......................................... 173
Displaying a Graph *....................................... 177
Adjusting Window Values with
the ( ZOOM Menu ........................................ 181
The ( MEMORY Menu........................................ 185
Chapter 10: Drawing
187
The 2 DRAW Menu............................................. 188
The 2 POINTS Menu............................................ 201
The 2 STO Menu ................................................. 206
TIN73 Table of Contents v
Chapter 11: Trigonometry
209
The - u TRIG Menu...........................................210
Graphing Trig Functions............................................214
The - u ANGLE Menu .......................................215
Chapter 12: Programming
221
What Is a Program? ...................................................223
Steps for Creating a Program....................................223
Creating and Naming a New Program .....................224
Entering Program Commands...................................226
The 8 CTL Menu ..................................................227
The 8 I/O Menu....................................................241
Editing Program Commands .....................................248
Executing a Program .................................................251
Debugging a Program...............................................252
Chapter 13: Communication Link and the
CBLàCBR Application
253
TIN73 Link Capabilities...............................................254
The Link SEND Menu 9 1...................................255
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 "..........................257
Transmitting Data Items............................................258
Backing Up Memory ..................................................261
Upgrading your TIN73 Graph Explorer Software.....262
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9...............................263
Steps for Running the CBLàCBR Application ..........264
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application...........................265
Specifying the Data Collection Method ...................265
Specifiying Data Collection Options.........................266
Collecting the Data....................................................273
Stopping Data Collection..........................................274
Chapter 14: Memory Management
275
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu...................................276
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 283
vi TI-73 Table of Contents
Appendix B: Reference Information
319
The TIN73 Menu Map................................................ 320
The VARS Menu - }....................................... 329
Equation Operating System (EOS é)........................ 330
In Case of Difficulty................................................... 330
Correcting an Error.................................................... 331
Error Messages........................................................... 332
Appendix C: BatteryàService and
Warranty Information
339
Battery Information .................................................. 340
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and Service ............. 342
Warranty Information............................................... 343
Index
345
Operating the TIN73
1
Preparing to Use Your TIN73.................................................3
Installing the AAA Batteries...........................................3
Turning the TIN73 On and Off .......................................3
Adjusting the Display Contrast ......................................4
Resetting Memory and All Defaults...............................4
The Home Screen...................................................................5
Entering Numbers and Other Characters.............................6
Entering a Negative Number a...................................6
Entering a Number in Scientific Notation - {.......7
Entering Secondary Functions -...............................7
Entering Text - t.................................................7
Common Display Cursors..............................................10
Editing Numbers and Characters .................................11
Functions and Instructions ..................................................12
Accessing Functions and Instructions from Menus .....12
Accessing FunctionsàInstructions from the CATALOG...14
Entering Expressions............................................................15
Grouping Parts of Expressions with Parentheses........16
Using Implied Multiplication in Expressions................16
Entering Multiple Expressions on One Line ................16
Retrieving Previous Entries - £..............................17
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer - ¢..............18
Continuing a Calculation with Ans..............................18
Using Ans as a Variable in an Expression ....................19
Storing Values to a Variable X .............................20
Recalling Variable Values - P.............................21
2
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Mode Settings ..................................................................... 22
Numeric Notation Mode .............................................. 23
Decimal Notation Mode............................................... 24
Angle Mode .................................................................. 24
Display Format Mode ................................................... 24
Simplification Mode ..................................................... 24
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 3
Preparing to Use Your TIN73
Before using your TIN73, you must install the batteries, turn on
the calculator, and adjust the contrast. You may reset (clear)
the calculator memory and defaults, if desired.
Installing the AAA Batteries
Install four AAA batteries in the battery compartment on the
back of the calculator. Arrange the batteries according to the
polarity (+ and -) diagram in the battery compartment. For
more information about installing batteries, see Appendix C:
BatteryàService and Warranty Information.
Turning the TIN73 On and Off
To turn on the TIN73, press ^.
To turn off the TIN73 manually,
press the yellow - key and
then press ^ (indicated in this
book as - ž).
When you press - ž, all settings and memory contents are
retained by Constant Memoryè. Any error condition is
cleared. To prolong battery life, the APDè (Automatic Power
Down) feature turns the TIN73 off automatically after a few
minutes without any activity.
When you turn on the calculator:
•
The Home screen is displayed if you previously turned off
the calculator by pressing - ž. It appears as it did
when you last used it; all errors are cleared.
– or –
•
The calculator displays the last screen (including the
display, cursor, and any errors) that was displayed before
Automatic Power Down turned off the calculator.
4
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Adjusting the Display Contrast
The brightness and contrast of the display can depend on
room lighting, battery freshness, and viewing angle.
To adjust the contrast:
1. Press and release the yellow - key.
2. Press and hold $ (to darken the screen) or # (to lighten
the screen).
As you change the contrast setting, a number from 0 (lightest)
to 9 (darkest) in the top-right corner indicates the current
setting. You may not be able to see the number if the contrast
is too light or too dark.
Resetting Memory and All Defaults
Follow these steps to reset the TIN73 to its factory settings
and clear all memory:
1. Turn on the calculator.
^
The ^ key
2. Display the MEMORY menu.
- Ÿ (above _ )
3. Display the RESET menu.
7
4. Display the RESET RAM
menu.
1
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 5
5. Select 2:Reset.
2
All memory is cleared, and the calculator is reset to the factory
settings.
When you reset the TIN73, the display contrast is reset. To
adjust the contrast, follow the directions in the previous
section.
The Home Screen
The Home screen is the primary
screen of the TIN73. To go to the
Home screen from any other
screen or menu, press - l.
On the Home screen, you can enter instructions, functions,
and expressions. The answers are displayed on the Home
screen. The TIN73 screen can display a maximum of eight lines
with a maximum of 16 characters per line.
When you calculate an entry on
the Home screen, depending
upon space, the answer is
displayed either directly to the
right of the entry or on the right
side of the next line.
If an entry is longer than one line
on the Home screen, it wraps to
the beginning of the next line.
6
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
If all lines of the display are full,
text scrolls off the top of the
display. The TIN73 stores the
previous entries as memory
permits. See the section entitled,
“Retrieving Previous Entries” on
page 17.
Scroll up
You can scroll up with $ to see
previously entered entries. If you
press b while a previous
entry is highlighted (for
with $.
example, 2+2+2+2+2+2+2+2),
the calculator copies it to a new
line below all entries (after
4+4+4ꢀ and its result, 52).
To clear the Home screen, see the section entitled “Editing
Numbers and Characters” on page 11.
Entering Numbers and Other
Characters
A symbol or abbreviation of each key’s primary function is
printed in white on the key. When you press that key, the
function name is inserted at the cursor location.
Entering a Negative Number a
You enter a negative number with the negation key, a. You
can use negation to modify a number, expression, or each
element in a list. Notice that this is different from the
subtraction key, T, which CANNOT be used for negation.
Subtract M14 N 68.
³
- l :
a 1 4 T 6 8 b
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 7
Entering a Number in Scientific Notation - {
Using - {, you can enter a number in scientific notation.
The notation used to display the result of a calculation
depends upon the . setting (Normal or Sci). For more
information on selecting modes, see the section in this chapter
entitled “Mode Settings.”
Add 30 © 4 + 8600.
³
- l : 3 0
If in Normal
- { \ 8 6 0 0
b
mode
If in Sci mode
Entering Secondary Functions -
The - key
The secondary function of each key is printed in yellow above
the key. When you press the yellow - key, the yellow
character, abbreviation, or word above a key, becomes active
for the next keystroke.
- t, which is the same as pressing - and
TEXT
then 1, displays the Text editor.
MATH
1 displays four math menus.
Entering Text - t
Many examples in this manual require you to enter alphabetic
characters, braces, a quotation mark, a space, or test
operators. You can access all of these from the Text editor.
To exit the Text editor without saving the contents on the
entry line, press - l, and the calculator returns you to
the Home screen.
8
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
In all guidebook examples, when a character in the Text editor
needs to be selected, the keystroke sequence shows the
character followed by b. Moving the Selection Cursor as
necessary to highlight the character is implied. To exit the
Text editor and display the contents on the entry line on the
previous screen, select Done.
- t
The entry line
Selection Cursor Highlights the character you want to
›
select. Use the cursor keys (", !, $, and
#) to move the cursor. A is highlighted
with the selection cursor in the - t
example screen.
Letters
Lists letters A-Z in alphabetical order.
(A-Z)
List Braces
Surround a set of numbers separated by
commas to create a list (outside of the List
editor). For example, {1,2,3} on the Home
screen is interpreted as a list.
{ }
Quotation Mark (") Surrounds the first text element in a
categorical list or surrounds an attached
list formula. (See Chapter 5: Lists for more
information.)
Space ( _ )
Places a space between characters. It is
frequently used in programs.
Test Operators
Used to compare two values.
=, ƒ, >, ‚, <,
Logic (Boolean)
Operators
and, or
Used to interpret values as zero (false) or
nonzero (true).
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 9
Done
Exits the Text editor when selected and
pastes all contents on the entry line to the
cursor location on the previous screen.
Entry Line
Displays all currently selected characters.
All edit keys, except the cursor keys, edit
characters on the entry line.
Insert R on the Home screen.
³
1. Go to the Home screen and
clear it, if desired.
- l :
Use $, #, ", and
2. Use the Text editor to
select R.
! to highlight R.
- t R b
R is pasted to
the entry line.
3. Exit the Text editor.
Done b
The Home
screen
Test and Logic (Boolean) Operators
You select test and logic operators exactly as you would a
letter. Both types of operators are explained in detail in
Chapter 2: Math Operations.
10 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Entry Line
The entry line displays all characters selected in the Text
editor. The entry line also accepts all number keys (Y, Z,
[, ꢀ) and many keyboard operations (6, I, \, C, etc.).
Enter these between Text editor characters, as necessary,
without leaving the Text editor.
If you press a key that isn’t accepted in the Text editor, the
calculator does not return an error. You must select Done to
exit and then continue your entry on the previous screen.
You can enter up to 16 characters on the entry line. If you need
to enter more than 16 characters, select Done to save your
entry. Then reenter the Text editor, and continue entering
additional characters.
Common Display Cursors
In most cases, the appearance of the cursor indicates what
happens when you press the next key or select the next menu
item.
If you press - while the Insert Cursor (Û) is displayed, the
underline cursor becomes an underlined #.
Cursor
Appearance
Effect of Next Keystroke
Entry
Solid Rectangle A character is entered at the
cursor; any existing character is
overwritten.
Ù
Insert
Underline
Ú
A character is inserted in front
of the cursor location.
Second
Reverse Arrow A 2nd character (yellow on the
Û
keyboard) is entered, or a 2nd
operation is executed.
Full
Checkerboard No entry; the maximum
Rectangle
characters are entered at a
prompt, or memory is full.
Ø
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 11
Editing Numbers and Characters
Using the edit keys, you can edit an entry on the Home screen
or Y= editor, programming commands in the Program editor,
the entry lines of the Text editor and List editor, and constants
in the Set Constant editor.
Keystrokes Result
! or "
Moves the cursor to the left or right. Moves the
Selection cursor in the Text editor.
$ or #
- !
- "
:
Moves/scrolls the cursor up or down.
Moves the cursor to the beginning of an entry.
Moves the cursor to the end of an entry.
•
Within a line on the Home screen, it
clears all characters to the right of the
cursor.
•
•
•
At the beginning or end of a line on the
Home screen, it clears the current line.
On a blank line on the Home screen, it
clears everything on the Home screen.
In an editor, it clears the expression or
value where the cursor is located.
/
Deletes the character at the cursor.
- m
Inserts characters in front of a character; to
end insertion, press - m or press !, ", $
or #.
<
I
Inserts a character before a fraction on the
Home screen. (- m inserts a character
before a fraction on any other screen.)
Inserts the variable X at the cursor location.
12 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Functions and Instructions
A function returns a value. Generally, the first letter of each
function is lowercase on the TIN73. For example, pxl-Test( is a
function because it returns a value, 0 or 1.
An instruction initiates an action. Generally, the first letter of
each instruction name is uppercase. For example, Pxl-On( is an
instruction that draws a pixel on the graph screen.
Most functions and some instructions take at least one
argument. An open parenthesis (() at the end of the function or
instruction name prompts you to enter an argument. Complete
the function with an end parenthesis, E.
Note: Do not use the Text editor to enter names of functions
or instructions. For example, you cannot enter L, then O, then
G to calculate the log of a value. If you did this, the calculator
would interpret the entry as implied multiplication of the
variables L, O, and G.
When this guidebook describes the syntax of a function or
instruction, each argument is in italics. Optional arguments for
a function are signified by brackets [ ]. Do not enter the
brackets.
Accessing Functions and Instructions from Menus
You can find most functions and instructions on menus (in
other words, not directly from the keyboard).
Displaying a Menu
To display a menu, press the key associated with the menu. Up
to four separate menus are displayed from which you choose
the menu item you want.
1
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 13
To move from menu to menu on a menu screen, press " or !
until the menu name is highlighted.
When a menu item ends in an ellipsis (ꢀ), the item displays a
secondary menu or editor when you select it.
- ‚
Accessing and Selecting Menu Items
To scroll up or down the menu items, press $ or #. To wrap
to the last menu item directly from the first menu item, press
$. To wrap to the first menu item directly from the last menu
item, press #.
When the menu continues beyond the displayed items, a $
replaces the colon next to the last displayed item.
Select a menu item in one of two ways:
•
•
Press # or $ to move the cursor to the number or letter
of the item, and then press b.
Press the number key for the number next to the item. If
a letter is next to the item, access letters from the Text
editor (- t).
After you select an item from a menu, you usually are returned
to the initial screen where you were working.
Exiting a Menu without Making a Selection
Exit a menu without making a selection in one of three ways:
•
•
•
Press : to return to the screen where you were.
Press - l to return to the Home screen.
Press a key or key sequence for another menu or for
another screen (except - t, which is not accessible
from all screens).
14 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Accessing FunctionsàInstructions from the
CATALOG
- | displays the CATALOG, which is an alphabetical
list of all functions, instructions, programming commands,
variables, and symbols on the TIN73. If, for example, you
cannot remember where a particular menu item is located, you
can find it in the CATALOG.
Items that begin with a number are in alphabetical order
according to the first letter after the number. For example,
1-Var Stats is among the items that begin with V.
Items that are symbols follow the last item that begins with Z.
You can access the symbols quickly by pressing $ from the
first catalog item, A§b/c. The cursor moves to the bottom of the
list.
Selection Cursor
- |
To select an item from the CATALOG:
1. Press - | to display the CATALOG. The Selection
Cursor always points to the first item.
2. Press $ or # to scroll the CATALOG until the Selection
Cursor points to the item you want.
To jump to the first item beginning with a particular letter,
select that letter from the Text editor. Press - t
while in the CATALOG, use the cursor keys to highlight the
letter you want, and then press b. You are
automatically returned to the CATALOG, and the Selection
Cursor has now moved to the new section. Scroll to the
item you want.
3. Press b to paste the CATALOG item to the current
screen.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 15
Enter the CATALOG and go directly to the section starting with
L.
³
1. Go to the CATALOG.
- |
2. Select L from Text editor.
- t L b
Selecting ¨ by pressing b pastes it to the previous screen,
just as if you had selected it from a menu.
Entering Expressions
An expression is a group of numbers, variables, functions and
their arguments, or a combination of these elements that
evaluates to a single answer. Instructions cannot be used in
expressions. An expression is completed when you press
b, regardless of the cursor location.
On the TIN73, you enter an expression in the same order as
you would write it on paper. The entire expression is
™
evaluated according to the Equation Operating System (EOS )
rules (which is explained in detail in Appendix B: Reference
Information), and the answer is displayed.
Calculate the area (A) of a circle whose radius (R)=3 using the
formula A=pR2. Then use the area to calculate the volume (V)
³
of a cylinder whose height (H)=4. Use the formula V=AQH.
- l :
- „ 3 6 b
16 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
M 4 b
Ans is the previous
answer, 28.27433388.
Grouping Parts of Expressions with Parentheses
The calculator calculates an expression within parentheses
first.
Calculate 4(1+2).
³
- l :
4 D 1 \ 2 E b
4(1+2)=4(3)=12
Using Implied Multiplication in Expressions
The calculator understands that two numbers separated by
parentheses are multiplied together.
Calculate 4Q3 using parentheses.
³
- l :
4 D 3 E b
Entering Multiple Expressions on One Line
To store more than one expression on a line, separate two or
more expressions or instructions on a line with a colon
(- | $ $ $ b).
Define the variable, R=5, and then calculate pR2 on the same
line.
³
1. Store 5 to R.
- l :
5 X - t
R b Done b
- |
$ $ $ b
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 17
2. Enter the second
expression, pR2, and
calculate the result.
- „ - t
R b Done b
6 b
Retrieving Previous Entries - £
When you press b on the Home screen to evaluate an
expression or execute an instruction, the expression or
instruction is placed in a storage area called Entry (last entry).
When you turn off the TIN73, Entry is retained in memory.
You can retrieve the last entry to the current cursor location,
where you can edit it, if desired, and then execute it. On the
Home screen or in an editor, press - £; the current line
is cleared and the last entry is pasted to the line.
The TIN73 retains as many previous entries as memory
permits. To cycle through these entries, press - £
repeatedly. To view stored entries, use $ to scroll up the
Home screen.
Store 1 to variable A, 1 to variable B, and then 3 to variable A
using - £.
³
1. Store 1 to A.
- l :
1 X - t
A b Done b
b
2. Recall the last entry.
- £
18 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
3. Edit and enter the new
expression.
! - t
B b Done b
b
4. Cycle back two entries.
- £ - £
5. Edit and enter the new
expression.
! ! ! 3 b
Recalling and Storing the Last Answer
- ¢
When an expression is evaluated successfully from the Home
screen or from a program, the TIN73 stores the answer to a
system variable called Ans (last answer). Recall Ans by
pressing - ¢. Ans can be a real number or a list. When you
turn off the TIN73, the value in Ans is retained in memory.
You can use the variable Ans in any place that is appropriate
for the type of answer Ans represents. For example, if Ans is a
real number, you can use it anywhere where real numbers are
accepted (Y= editor, WINDOW, List editor, etc.).
Continuing a Calculation with Ans
You can recall Ans as the first entry in the next expression
without entering the value again or pressing - ¢. After
completing a calculation, press an operation or function key
(excluding <, =, or @) and the calculator displays Ans
and uses the value in the next calculation.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 19
1. Calculate 34 using the Ans
feature.
- l :
³
3 M 3 b
M 3 b
M 3 b
2. Check your answer, if
desired.
3 7 4 b
Using Ans as a Variable in an Expression
Since Ans is a variable, you can use it in expressions just as
you would any other variable. When the expression is
evaluated, the TIN73 uses the value of Ans in the calculation.
For more information about variables, see the next two
sections in this chapter entitled, “Storing Values to a Variable”
and “Recalling Variable Values.”
Calculate the area of a garden plot 1.7 meters by 4.2 meters.
Then calculate the yield per square meter if the plot produces
a total of 147 tomatoes.
³
1. Calculate the area.
- l :
1 . 7 M 4 . 2 b
2. Divide 147 by Ans, which
was calculated in the first
step.
Ans=7.14
1 4 7 F - ¢ b
20 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Storing Values to a Variable X
You can store values or expressions that result in one value or
lists to a one-letter variable or a system variable (types are
listed below) to save for later use. Also, you can save a result
for later use by storing Ans to a variable before you evaluate
another expression.
When an expression containing the name of a variable is
evaluated, the value of the variable at that time is used. You
can enter and use several types of data for variables, including
real numbers, lists, functions, statistical plots, and graph
pictures.
Variable names cannot be the same as a name that is
preassigned by the TIN73. These include built-in functions
such as abs( , instructions such as Line( , and system variables
such as Xmin.
Variable Type
Names
Real Numbers
A, B, ꢀ, Z (- t)
Lists—Numerical
and Categorical
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and any user-defined
list names (- v Ls)
Functions
Stat Plots
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4 (- } 2:Y-Vars)
Plot1, Plot2, Plot3 (- e from the
Program editor)
Graph Pictures
Pic1, Pic2, Pic3 (- } 4:Picture)
System Variables
Xmin, Xmax, ꢀ (- } 1:Window)
Store a value to either a system variable or a letter variable
from the Home screen or a program using the X key. Begin
on a blank line and follow these steps.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 21
1. Enter the numeric value. It can be an expression that
results in a numeric value.
2. Press X. " is copied to the cursor location.
3. Select the type of variable to which you want to store the
value. Use the Text editor (- t) to enter a letter
variable, the VARS (- }) menu to enter a system
variable, or the - v Ls menu to enter a list name.
4. Press b. If you entered an expression, it is evaluated.
The value is stored to the variable.
Store 10 to R, and then calculate pR2.
³
1. On the Home screen, store
10 to R.
- l :
1 0 X - t
R b Done b
b
2. Calculate pR2.
- „ - t
R b Done b
6 b
Recalling Variable Values - P
To recall a variable’s value to the current cursor location,
follow these steps. To leave Rcl, press :.
1. Press - P. Rcl and the edit cursor are displayed on
the bottom line of the screen.
2. Enter the name of the variable in any of four ways:
•
•
Enter letters using the Text editor (- t).
Press - v, and then select the name of the list
from the Ls menu.
22 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
•
•
Press - } to display the VARS menu; next select
the type and then the name of the variable or
function.
Press 8 (from the Program editor only), and then
select the name of the program to call a program as a
subroutine within another program.
3. The variable name you selected is displayed on the
bottom line and the cursor disappears.
4. Press b. The variable contents are inserted where the
cursor was located before you began these steps.
Calculate 100+R using the Rcl function. (R was defined in the
previous section, “Storing Variable Values.”)
³
1. On the Home screen, enter
the first part of the
calculation.
- l : 1 0 0 \
2. Recall R.
- P - t
R b Done b
R=10
3. Finish the calculation.
b
b
Mode Settings
Mode settings control how the TIN73 interprets and displays
numbers. Mode settings are retained by the Constant Memory
feature when the TIN73 is turned off. All numbers, including
elements of lists, are displayed according to the current mode
settings, as applicable. To display the mode settings, press
.. The default settings are highlighted on the following
screen.
Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73 23
To select a mode setting, highlight the one you want by using
the cursor keys, and then press b.
Default
Settings
.
Normal Sci
Numeric Notation mode
Decimal Notation mode
Angle mode
Float 0123456789
Degree Radian
A§b/c b/c
Display Format mode (fractions only)
Autosimp Mansimp Simplification mode (fractions only)
Numeric Notation Mode
The Numeric Notation mode settings affect the way an answer
is displayed on the TIN73. Numeric answers can be displayed
with up to 10 digits and a two-digit exponent. Answers
(excluding fractional ones) on the Home screen, list elements
in the List editor, and table elements on the Table screen are
displayed according to the Numeric Notation mode selected.
The Normal setting displays results with digits to the left and
right of the decimal, as in 123456.78.
The Sci (scientific) setting expresses numbers with one digit to
the left of the decimal and the appropriate power of 10 to the
right of ©, as in 1.2345678 © 5, (which is the same as 123456.78).
Note: Answers that have more than 10 digits and whose
absolute value is greater than .001 are displayed in scientific
notation.
24 Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73
Decimal Notation Mode
The Decimal Notation mode has two settings, Float and
0123456789, which only affect the way an answer is displayed
on the TIN73.
The Float (floating decimal point) setting displays up to 10
digits, plus the sign and decimal.
The 0123456789 (fixed decimal point) setting specifies the
number of digits (0 through 9) to display to the right of the
decimal. Place the cursor on the desired number of decimal
digits, and then press b.
The decimal setting applies to answers (excluding fractional
ones) on the Home screen, X- and Y-coordinates on a graph
display, list elements in the List editor, table elements on the
Table screen, and regression model results.
Angle Mode
The Angle mode has two settings, Degree and Radian, which
control how the TIN73 interprets angle values in trigonometric
functions. See Chapter 11: Trigonometry for a detailed
explanation.
Display Format Mode
The Display Format mode has two settings, A§b/c and b/c,
which determine if a fraction is displayed as a mixed or simple
fraction. See Chapter 3: Fractions for a detailed explanation.
Simplification Mode
The Simplification mode has two settings, Autosimp and
Mansimp, which determine if the calculator automatically
simplifies a fractional result completely or if you must simplify
the results manually step-by-step. See Chapter 3: Fractions for
detailed information.
Math Operations
2
Keyboard Math Operations ................................................27
Basic Operations \, T, M, F.....................................27
Integer Division - Œ............................................28
p - „........................................................................28
Percent C....................................................................29
Inverse Function - ƒ .............................................30
Square 6 ....................................................................30
Power 7 ......................................................................31
Square Root - z ....................................................31
Test Operations - t...........................................32
The 1 MATH Menu........................................................34
lcm( 1 1..................................................................35
gcd( 1 2..................................................................36
3 (Cube) 1 3...........................................................37
3
‡( 1 4....................................................................38
x
‡ 1 5 .....................................................................38
Solver 1 6...............................................................38
The 1 NUM Menu..........................................................44
abs( 1 " 1..............................................................44
round( 1 " 2.........................................................45
iPart( and fPart( 1 " 3 and 4 ...............................46
min( and max( 1 " 5 and 6..................................47
remainder( 1 " 7..................................................48
The 1 PRB Menu ............................................................49
rand 1 " " 1........................................................49
randInt( 1 " " 2 ..................................................50
nPr 1 " " 3 ..........................................................51
nCr 1 " " 4..........................................................51
! 1 " " 5 ..............................................................52
coin( 1 " " 6........................................................53
dice( 1 " " 7........................................................53
26 Chapter 2: Math Operations
The 1 LOG Menu........................................................... 54
log( 1 " " " 1 .................................................... 54
10^( 1 " " " 2.................................................... 55
ln( 1 " " " 3 ...................................................... 55
e^( 1 " " " 4...................................................... 56
Chapter 2: Math Operations 27
Keyboard Math Operations
The following sections explain how to use the math functions,
including - functions, found on the TIN73 keyboard. All of
the examples in these sections assume that you are on the
Home screen and that defaults are selected (unless specified
otherwise).
Real numbers include fractions unless specified otherwise.
Basic Operations \, T, M, F
Returns the sum (\), difference (T), product (M), or quotient
(F) of valueA and valueB, which can be real numbers,
expressions, or lists.
If both values are lists, they must have the same number of
elements. If one value is a list and the other is a non-list, the
non-list is paired with each element of the list, and a list is
returned.
valueA + valueB
valueA N valueB
valueA ¦ valueB
valueA P valueB
Add M456 + 123.
³
: a 4 5 6 \ 1 2 3
b
³
³
Divide 45.68 P 123.
4 5 . 6 8 F 1 2 3 b
Multiply log(20) Q cos(60).
1 " " " 1
2 0 E M - u 3
6 0 E b
In Degree mode
28 Chapter 2: Math Operations
Integer Division - Œ
- Œ divides two positive integers and displays the
quotient and the remainder, r.
posintegerA Intà posintegerB
quotient=5
5
5r1
11
The result includes
the quotient and the
remainder, r.
2
2
11
10
1
10
1
remainder=1
You can include integer division in an expression, but the
remainder may not be displayed as part of the final answer.
After a calculation with - Œ is completed, only the
quotient from the result is stored in Ans (last answer).
Therefore, if you use the result in another calculation, the
remainder is ignored.
Calculate 11 P 2 using integer
division.
³
: 1 1 - Œ 2
b
p - „
Represents the value for the constant, p, in calculations. The
calculator uses p=3.1415926535898, although it only displays
3.141592654 on the screen. p acts as a real number in any
calculation.
³
Multiply 4 Q p.
: 4 M -
„ b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 29
³
Calculate sin(p).
: - u 1 -
„ E b
If in Radian
mode
If in Degree mode
Percent C
Changes a real_number to percent. Results display according
to the Decimal Notation mode setting.
real_number%
Convert M30.6% to a decimal.
³
1. Select Float Decimal
setting.
. # b
- l
2. Convert M30.6% to a
decimal.
: a 3 0 . 6 C
b
³
³
Calculate 20% of 30.
2 0 C M 3 0 b
Calculate 30 + 20% of 30.
3 0 \ 2 0 C M 3 0 b
30 Chapter 2: Math Operations
Inverse Function - ƒ
Returns the inverse, x-1, of value, which is the equivalent of the
1
reciprocal, / , of a real number, expression, or each element
x
in a list.
value -1
Important: To ensure that results are displayed as simple
fractions instead of mixed numbers, select b/c Display Format
mode.
-1
5
Calculate /
.
³
³
8
: 5 = 8 " - ƒ
b
Calculate M2.5-1.
a 2 . 5 - ƒ b
Square 6
Finds the square of a real number, an expression, or each
element in a list. Note: Using parentheses with 6 ensures
that you get the correct answer. Refer to Appendix B:
Reference Information for Equation Operating System (EOS)
calculation rules.
value2
Calculate 52.
³
³
: 5 6 b
Compare the results of M52 and (M5)2..
1. Calculate M52.
a 5 6 b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 31
2. Calculate (M5)2..
D a 5 E 6 b
Power 7
Raises value to any power. value and power can be real
numbers, expression, or lists. If both are lists, they must have
the same number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each element of the
list, and a list is returned.
value^power
value is limited by mathematical rules. For example, (M4)^.5
results in an error because this is the equivalent of (M4)^1/2,
‡M4, a complex number.
which is
Calculate 25.
³
: 2 7 5 b
Square Root - z
Calculates the square root of value, which can be a positive
real number, an expression that results in a positive real
number, or a list of positive numbers.
‡(value)
Calculate ‡256.
³
: - z 2 5 6 E
b
32 Chapter 2: Math Operations
Test Operations - t
The two types of test operations included in the Text editor
are relational operators (=, ƒ, >, ‚, <, and ) and logic (Boolean)
operators (and and or).
Both relational and logic operators often are used in programs
to control program flow and in graphing to control the graph
as a function over specific values.
Relational Operators
Relational operators compare conditionA and conditionB and
return 1 if the conditional statement is true. They return 0 if
the conditional statement is false. conditionA and conditionB
can be real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one condition is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
Test operations are frequently used in programs.
conditionA relational_operator conditionB
Relational operators are evaluated after mathematical
functions according to EOS rules (Appendix B: Reference
Information). Therefore, for 2+2=2+3, the TI-73 returns 0. It
compares 4 with 5 and returns 0, because the operation is
false. For 2+(2=2)+3, the TI-73 returns 6. The relational test in
parentheses returns 1, because the operation is true. Then it
adds 2+(1)+3.
Chapter 2: Math Operations 33
Operator:
Returns true (1) if:
= (equal)
Two conditions are equal.
ƒ (not equal to)
> (greater than)
Two conditions are not equal.
conditionA is greater than conditionB.
‚ (greater than or
equal to)
conditionA is greater than or equal to
conditionB.
< (less than)
conditionA is less than conditionB.
(less than or
equal to)
conditionA is less than or equal to
conditionB.
Logic (Boolean) Operators
Logic (Boolean) operators compare conditionA and
conditionB and return 1 if the conditional statement is true.
They return 0 if the conditional statement is false. conditionA
and conditionB can be real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one condition is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
conditionA and conditionB
conditionA or conditionB
Operator:
Returns true (1) if:
and
or
Both conditions are nonzero.
At least one condition is nonzero.
1
Test / =
16
/
32
.
2
³
- l
: 1 = 2 "
- t = b Done
b 1 6 = 3 2 b
1=true
34 Chapter 2: Math Operations
For L1={1,2,3}, test L1>log(30).
³
1. Define L1.
: - t
{ b 1 ¡ 2 ¡ 3 }
b Done b
X - v 1 b
2. Test L1 > log(30).
- v 1 - t
> b Done b
1 ! 1 3 0 E b
1>log(30) is false;
2>log(30) is true;
3>log(30) is true.
Test cos(90) and sin(0).
³
: - u 3
9 0 E - t and
b Done b
- u 1 0 E b
The 1 MATH Menu
The 1 MATH menu includes various math functions.
1
Chapter 2: Math Operations 35
1:lcm(
2:gcd(
Finds the least common multiple, which is the
smallest number that two integers can divide into
evenly.
Finds the greatest common divisor, which is the
largest number that divides into two integers
evenly.
3:3
Calculates the cube.
4:3‡(
Calculates the cube root.
Calculates the xth root.
Displays the Equation Solver.
5:x‡
6:Solver…
lcm( 1 1
The least common multiple (LCM) function returns the
smallest number that two positive whole numbers can divide
into evenly, of two positive whole numbers or lists of positive
whole numbers. If both arguments are lists, they must have the
same number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each element of the
list, and a list is returned.
lcm( is frequently used with fractions to find a common
denominator. See Chapter 3: Fractions for more information
on entering fractions.
lcm(valueA,valueB)
Find the LCM of 6 and 9.
³
: 1 1
6 ¡ 9 E b
36 Chapter 2: Math Operations
1
5
Add / + / (using LCM).
³
4
6
1. Find the LCM of the
denominators.
Therefore, 12 is
the common
1 1
denominator.
4 ¡ 6 E b
1
2. Use the LCM to convert /
4
1 3 3
Q =
4 3 12
5
and / to fractions where
6
12 is the common
LCM=12
denominator (without using
the calculator).
5 2 10
Q =
6 2 12
3. Add the newly converted
fractions (without using the
calculator).
3 10 13
+
12 12 12
=
4. Verify your answer by
adding the original fractions
on the calculator. Select the
b/c Display Format mode
setting and clear the Home
screen, if desired.
. # # # " b
- l :
1 = 4 " \ 5 = 6
b
gcd( 1 2
The greatest common divisor (GCD) function returns the
largest number that divides into two positive whole numbers
or lists of positive whole numbers evenly. If both arguments
are lists, they must have the same number of elements. If one
argument is a list and the other a non-list, the non-list is paired
with each element of the list, and a list is returned.
This is frequently used with fractions to reduce them to lowest
terms. See Chapter 2: Fractions for more information on
entering fractions.
Chapter 2: Math Operations 37
gcd(valueA,valueB)
27
Find the greatest common divisor for the fraction,
27
/
36
³
.
1. Find the GCD of
/
36
.
1 2
2 7 ¡ 3 6 E b
GCD=9
2. Simplify the fraction
completely using the GCD 27 9 3
P =
36 9 4
(without using the
calculator).
3. Verify your answer by
27
by 9 on the
36
simplifying
/
calculator. You must be in
Mansimp mode setting.
. # # # # "
b - l
2 7 = 3 6 " B 9
b
3
1 3
Calculates the cube of n, which is equivalent to n Q n Q n of
any real number, expression, or each element in a list.
n3
Calculate 53.
³
5 1 3
b
53 = 5 Q 5 Q 5 = 125
38 Chapter 2: Math Operations
3
‡( 1 4
Calculates the cube root of value, which is equivalent to n
where n3=value. value can be a real number, expression, or
list.
3
3
For n =value, ‡value=n
3
‡(value)
Calculate 3‡(125).
³
1 4 1 2 5 E b
3
‡(125) = 5
because 53=125
x
‡ 1 5
Calculates the xth root of value, which is equivalent to n where
nx=value. value can be a real number, expression, or list. x
can be any real number.
x
x
For n =value, ‡value=n
x
x
‡(value)
Calculate 6‡64.
: 6 1 5
6 4 b
³
x
6 ‡64 = 2
because 26=64
Solver 1 6
The Equation Solver allows you to solve for one unknown
one-letter variable in an equation containing up to 5 one-letter
variables. By default, the equation is assumed to be equal to 0;
however, you can set the equation equal to any real number
(or an expression that results in a real number).
The screen you see when you select Solver depends on
whether an equation has been defined previously.
To exit Solver and return to the Home screen, press - l.
Chapter 2: Math Operations 39
The EQUATION SOLVER Screen
If no equation is currently defined, pressing 1 6 takes you
to the EQUATION SOLVER screen. Enter the equation at the
cursor, using the Text editor (- t) to enter the variable
names.
1 6
You can have more than one variable on each side of the
equation. For example, A + B = B + D + E.
If you do not set the equation equal to a value, the calculator
automatically sets it equal to 0. For example, to enter A+B=0,
just enter A+B and press b. You are limited to 5 variables
per equation.
The Equation Variables Screen
If an equation has been defined previously, pressing 1 6
takes you to the Equation Variables screen.
Your screen
may vary.
1 6
40 Chapter 2: Math Operations
Equation
Displays the currently defined
equation.
Equation Variables
Displays all equation variables and
their values.
bound
Displays the bound limits that apply to
Default={M1©99,1©99} the unknown variable value for which
you are solving.
Solve
You select one variable, the one you
want to solve for, from this list.
Equation
The first line of the Equation Variables screen displays the
equation you defined on the EQUATION SOLVER screen.
If you would like to edit a defined equation, press $ until the
EQUATION SOLVER screen is displayed. Edit the equation with
:, /, or - m, as necessary. Then press b to
return to the Equation Variables screen.
Equation Variables
All variables included in the defined equation are displayed. If
those variables have never been assigned a value, they are set
equal to 0. If a variable has been defined previously (for
example, from the Home screen), that value appears.
If a value extends beyond the screen, press " to scroll to the
end of the number. This is especially important if a number is
in scientific notation and you need to see whether it has a
negative or positive exponent.
For an equation with more than one variable, you must define
all variables except the unknown variable for which you want
to solve.
Chapter 2: Math Operations 41
bound
bound limits apply to the unknown variable value for which
you are solving. Default bounds are {M1©99,1©99}. Use these
limits to narrow the unknown value solution to a specific
range of numbers, especially if more than one answer exists.
Hint: For answers with many solutions (for example, trig
functions), consider graphing the function first to get an idea
of the most ideal (or specific) bound limits.
Solve
Specify the unknown variable from the Solve line. This
prompts the calculator to solve for it.
To select a variable on the Solve line, highlight the unknown
variable with the cursor, and then press b. After you press
b, a solid black square appears next to the solved
(previously unknown) variable displayed in the Equation
Variables section.
Hint: The Solver allows for a small tolerance when solving a
result, which is noticeable especially when solving complex
equations or those with multiple solutions. For example, a
result of 3.99999999999999 (instead of 4) for the equation 16=x2
is considered a correct answer.
Solving Equations with Only One Possible Answer
For 2(L+M)=N, solve for L when N=268, and M=40, M14, and
307.
³
1. Define the equation on the
EQUATION SOLVER screen.
1 6
$ : (if necessary)
42 Chapter 2: Math Operations
2. Enter the equation.
Your variable
values may vary.
- t
2 D L b \ M b
E = b N b
Done b b
3. Enter the first value for M,
40, and N, 268.
# 4 0 # 2 6 8
4. Solve for L.
# # b
5. Solve for L when M=M14.
# a 1 4 # # # b
6. Solve for L when M=307.
# 3 0 7 # # # b
Solving Equations with More Than One Answer
The calculator only returns one solution even if more than one
possible solution exists. When this is the case, you can first
enter a guess by assigning a value to that variable and then
asking the calculator to solve your equation. The TI-73 always
chooses the solution closest to that guess. However, the guess
must be within the bound limits; otherwise, you get an error.
Chapter 2: Math Operations 43
Find the negative solution to the equation, 16=X2.
³
1. Define the equation on the
EQUATION SOLVER screen.
1 6
$ : (if necessary)
Your X value
2. Enter the equation.
may vary.
- t
1 6 = b I 6 Done
b b
3. Use bound to limit your
answer to a negative one
(between M16 and 0).
# " a 16 / / " 0
/ / /
4. Solve for X.
# b
5. The guess, X=10, is not
between the limit bounds.
You must clear or change it.
(This step uses a different
guess, M6.)
L6 is between
the bounds.
2 : a 6
6. Solve for X.
# # b
44 Chapter 2: Math Operations
The 1 NUM Menu
The 1 NUM (number) menu includes seven different math
functions.
1 "
1:abs(
Calculates the absolute value of a real number,
list, or expression.
2:round(
3:iPart(
4:fPart(
5:min(
Rounds a real number, list, or expression.
Returns only the integer part of a result.
Returns only the fractional part of a result.
Returns the minimum of two real numbers, lists,
or expressions.
6:max(
Returns the maximum of two real numbers, lists,
or expressions.
7:remainder( Returns the remainder resulting from the division
of two real numbers or lists.
abs( 1 " 1
Returns the absolute value of a real number, expression, or
each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is
calculated and the absolute value of that result is returned.
abs(value)
Find the absolute value of M35.2.
³
1 " 1 a 3 5 . 2 E
b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 45
round( 1 " 2
Returns a number, expression, or each element in a list
rounded to 10 digits or #decimal_places (9), if specified. The
final result is always displayed according to the Decimal
Notation mode (.) unless #decimal_places is specified,
which overrides the current setting. Notice that the Decimal
Notation mode settings do change the display but not the value
of the result. Therefore, the entire result is stored in the
calculator ready to use for future calculations, as applicable.
round(value[,#decimal_places])
Round p to different numbers of decimal places using different
Decimal Notation mode settings.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to Float, if necessary.
. # b
- l :
2. Round p to 3 decimal
places.
1 " 2 - „
¡ 3 E b
3. Set Decimal Notation mode
to 4.
. # " " " " "
b - l
4. Round p to 3 decimal
places.
- £ b
46 Chapter 2: Math Operations
5. Leave the Decimal Notation
mode at 4 and round p to 5
digits.
- £ ! ! 5
b
iPart( and fPart( 1 " 3 and 4
iPart( returns the integer part of a real number, expression, or
each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is
calculated and the integer part of the result is displayed.
iPart(value)
fPart( returns the fractional part of a real number, expression,
or each element in a list. For an expression, the expression is
calculated and the fractional part of the result is displayed.
If value is a mixed number, the fractional part is returned and
displayed according to the current Simplification mode
setting.
fPart(value)
Find the integer and fractional part of 23.45.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to Float.
. # b
- l
2. Find the integer part.
: 1 " 3
2 3 . 4 5 E b
3. Find the fractional part.
1 " 4
2 3 . 4 5 E b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 47
1
Find the fractional part of 1 /
2.
³
1 " 4 1 <
1 = 2 " E b
min( and max( 1 " 5 and 6
These are identical to the min( and max( commands found on
the - v MATH menu.
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or the
smallest element in one list. value can be a real number,
expression, or a list.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
min(valueA,valueB)
min(list)
max( (maximum) functions exactly like min(, but it always
returns the larger of two values or the largest element in a list.
max(valueA,valueB)
max(list)
For this example, the Decimal mode settings are set to Float.
Compare L1 and L2 to find the min( and max(. L1={1,2,3}, and
³
L2={3,2,1}.
1. Define L1 and L2 in the List
editor.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
48 Chapter 2: Math Operations
2. Find the list minimums.
-l:
1"5
- v 1 ¡
- v 2 E b
3. Find the list maximums.
1"6
- v 1 ¡
- v 2 E b
remainder( 1 " 7
Returns the remainder resulting from the division of two
positive whole numbers, dividend and divisor, each of which
can be a list of positive whole numbers. They also are subject
to mathematical rules. For example, divisorƒ0.
remainder(dividend,divisor)
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is paired with each element of the list, and a list of
remainders is returned.
remainder(list,divisor)
remainder(dividend,list)
remainder(list,list)
Calculate 10P6 and return
the remainder only.
1
³
divisor=6
dividend=10
remainder=4
6
10
8
4
: 1 " 7
1 0 ¡ 6 E b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 49
The 1 PRB Menu
The 1 PRB (probability) menu lets you select functions
that are often used to calculate probabilities.
1 " "
1:rand
Generates a random number between 0 and 1.
2:randInt( Generates a random integer between two values.
3:nPr
4:nCr
Calculates the number of permutations for a group
of items.
Calculates the number of combinations for a group
of items.
5:!
Calculates the factorial of a positive integer.
Simulates one or more coin tosses.
Simulates one or more dice rolls.
6:coin(
7:dice(
rand 1 " " 1
Generates a random real number between 0 and 1
(0<number<1). rand takes no arguments.
rand
If you want to control a sequence of random numbers, first
store an integer “seed value” to rand. The calculator generates
a specific sequence of random numbers from each seed value.
To get a different sequence, use a different seed value. The
default seed value is 0.
seed Xrand
50 Chapter 2: Math Operations
Generate a sequence of random numbers using whatever value
happens to be the current seed.
³
: 1 " " 1
b b b
Your results
may vary.
Generate a sequence of random numbers using seed=1.
³
: 1 X 1 "
" 1 b 1 " " 1
b b
randInt( 1 " " 2
Generates a random integer between lower and upper (both
integers) boundaries.
The random integer returned may be one of the boundaries.
For example, randInt(1,5) may return 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
To generate more than one random integer, specify
#ofIntegers, a positive whole number >0.
randInt(lower,upper[,#ofIntegers])
Your result
Find a random integer from 2 through 10.
³
may vary.
: 1 " " 2
2 ¡ 1 0 E b
Find 4 random integers from 2
through 10. (Recall and edit the
last entry.)
³
Your result may
vary.
- £ ! ¡ 4 E
b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 51
nPr 1 " " 3
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken
r number at a time. The order in which you select the items
DOES matter. items and number can be nonnegative integers
or lists of nonnegative integers.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is paired with each element in the list, and a list of
permutations is returned.
items nPr number
From a group of 4 items (ABCD), how many ways can you
select 2 of the items if the order does matter?
³
Find 4 nPr 2.
: 4 1 " " 3
2 b
AB and BA count
as two
AB
BA
CA
DA
AC
BC
CB
DB
AD
BD
CD
DC
permutations.
permutations of
4 items taken
ABCD
2 at a time
nCr 1 " " 4
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken
r number at a time. In combinations, the order in which you
select the items DOES NOT matter. items and number can be
nonnegative integers or lists of nonnegative integers.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is paired with each element in the list, and a list of
combinations is returned.
items nCr number
52 Chapter 2: Math Operations
From a group of 4 items (ABCD), how many ways can you
select 2 of the items if the order does not matter?
³
Find 4 nCr 2.
: 4 1 " " 4
2 b
AB and BA count
as only one
AB
BA
CA
DA
AC
BC
CB
DB
AD
BD
CD
DC
combinations of
combination.
ABCD
4 items taken
2 at a time
! 1 " " 5
Returns the factorial of value. value can be an integer or list of
integers between 0 and 69. By definition, 0! = 1.
Factorials are similar to permutations because the order
DOES matter. You can think of 4! as the total number of ways
that 4 items can be arranged.
value!
4! = 4Q3Q2Q1
Find 4!
³
: 4 1 " " 5
b
24 possible arrangements
ABCD ABDC ACBD ACDB ADBC ADCB
BACD BADC BCAD BCDA BDCA BDAC
4!
ABCD
CABD CADB CBAD CBDA CDAB CDBA
DABC DACB DBAC DBCA DCAB DCBA
Chapter 2: Math Operations 53
coin( 1 " " 6
Returns a random list of 0s and 1s that represents heads and
tails for one or more coin tosses. tosses is a positive whole
number.
coin(tosses)
Simulate tossing a coin 7 times.
³
: 1 " " 6
7 E b
4 heads and 3 tails
(or 3 heads and 4 tails).
Your result may vary.
dice( 1 " " 7
Returns a random list of numbers (between 1 and 6) that
represents dice rolls. dice( takes one optional argument,
#ofdice, a positive whole number>1. If #ofdice is specified,
each list element is the total sum of one roll’s results.
dice(rolls[,#ofDice])
Simulate 5 dice rolls for one die.
³
: 1 " " 7
5 E b
Your result may
vary.
Simulate 5 rolls of 3 dice.
³
: - £
! ¡ 3 E b
The three dice totaled 11 on
the first roll, 10 on the
second roll, etc. Your result
may vary.
54 Chapter 2: Math Operations
The 1 LOG Menu
The 1 LOG (logarithm) menu lets you select functions that
are used to calculate base-10 and base-e logarithms and
powers.
1 " " "
NorN
1 !
1:log(
2:10^(
3:ln(
Returns the base-10 logarithm of a value.
Raises 10 to a power.
Calculates the natural logarithm of a value.
Raises e to a power (e = 2.71828182846).
4:e^(
log( 1 " " " 1
The logarithm is the exponent, x, indicating the power which a
fixed number (using base 10) must be raised to in order to
produce a given number, a.
x
For 10 =a, log10a=x
log( returns the logarithm of a positive real number, an
expression that results in a positive real number, or a list of
positive real numbers.
log(value)
log(list)
Calculate log(30).
³
: 1 " " " 1
3 0 E b
Chapter 2: Math Operations 55
10^( 1 " " " 2
Raises 10 to a power of x, where x is an integer, an expression
that results in an integer, or a list of integers. If x10M4 or ‚1010,
the result is displayed in scientific notation.
10^(integer)
10^(x)
Calculate 10^(6), which is often written as 106.
³
³
: 1 " " " 2
6 E b
Calculate 10^(M4).
1 " " " 2
a 4 E b
ln( 1 " " " 3
The natural logarithm is the exponent, x, indicating the power
which the base, e, must be raised to in order to produce a
given number, a.
x
For e =a, ln(a)=x
The calculator uses e=2.718281828459, although it only
displays 2.718281828 on the screen.
ln( returns the natural logarithm of a positive real number, an
expression that results in a positive real number, or a list of
positive real numbers.
ln(value)
ln(list)
56 Chapter 2: Math Operations
1
Calculate ln( / ).
³
2
: 1 " " " 3
1 = 2 " E b
e^( 1 " " " 4
Raises e to a power of x, where x is a real number, an
expression that results in an real number, or a list of real
numbers.
The calculator uses e=2.718281828459, although it only
displays 2.718281828 on the screen.
e^(x)
e^(list)
Calculate e^5, which is often written as e5.
³
: 1 " " " 4
5 E b
Fractions
3
Entering Fractions................................................................58
Using Fractions in Calculations ...........................................59
Fraction Modes....................................................................60
Display Format Mode Settings .....................................60
Simplification Mode Settings .......................................60
Autosimp Setting ..........................................................61
Mansimp Setting...........................................................62
Converting Between Fractions and Decimals ....................64
Converting Between Mixed Numbers
and Simple Fractions ..............................................65
58 Chapter 3: Fractions
Entering Fractions
Simple fractions consist of a numerator and denominator.
Mixed numbers combine a whole number with a fraction.
Note: The numerator and denominator cannot be a fraction.
Simple Fractions
numerator = denominator "
2
=
3
2
³
Enter / .
3
2
3
1. Enter the numerator, 2.
2 =
"
2. Enter the denominator, 3.
3
Continue the calculation
at the cursor.
3. End the fraction.
"
Mixed Numbers
whole_number < numerator = denominator "
1 <
2
Enter 1 / .
3
2
=
3
³
2
3
1
1. Enter the whole number, 1.
1 <
"
2. Enter the numerator, 2.
2 =
3. Enter the denominator, 3.
3
Continue the calculation
at the cursor.
4. End the mixed number.
"
Chapter 3: Fractions 59
Using Fractions in Calculations
The type of calculation and the input values determine
whether the results of a calculation are shown as a fraction or
a decimal. You can enter fractions with all operation keys (\,
M, F, etc.), most function keys (6, C, ƒ, etc.), and many
menu items (abs(, fPart(, sin(, etc.).
Fractional calculations return fractional results, if possible,
except for those that:
•
•
Use - „, C, log(, ln(, e^(
– or –
Calculate to a result
1000
1
1
‚
or <
1000
– or –
•
•
Include both a fraction and a
decimal
– or –
Use items from the following
menus: - ‚;
- v MATH and CALC;
- u TRIG and ANGLE
60 Chapter 3: Fractions
Fraction Modes
Two fraction modes exist on the calculator: Display Format
mode and Simplification mode.
Display Format Mode Settings
The Display Format mode settings, A§bàc and bàc, determine
whether or not a fractional result is displayed as a mixed
number or a simple fraction. To select a mode setting, press
., highlight the setting with the cursor keys, and then
press b.
.
A§b/c
Displays result as a mixed number, if applicable.
Displays result as a simple fraction.
b/c
In A§b/c
4
8
Add / + / .
³
5
5
mode
4 = 5 " \ 8 = 5
b
In b/c mode
Simplification Mode Settings
The Simplification mode settings, Autosimp and Mansimp,
determine whether or not a fractional result is simplified
automatically.
.
Chapter 3: Fractions 61
Autosimp
Mansimp
The calculator automatically simplifies
fractional results.
The user simplifies fractions manually step-by-
step. $ next to the result signifies that it can be
simplified at least one more time.
In Autosimp
1
Add / + /
5
mode
.
9
9
³
1 = 9 " \ 5 = 9
b
In Mansimp
mode
6
9
$
The total shaded area in the first
diagram is equal to the total
shaded area in the second one.
2
3
Autosimp Setting
In this example, Display Format mode settings do not affect
the display of the result because the result is a simple fraction.
1
Add / + / .
1
4
4
³
1. Select Autosimp mode, if
necessary, and return to the
Home screen.
. # # # # b
- l
1
2. Add / + / .
1
4
4
1 = 4 " \ 1 = 4 b
62 Chapter 3: Fractions
Mansimp Setting
When the Mansimp setting is selected, the result of a
calculation is not simplified automatically. $ next to a result
means that it is unsimplified and can be simplified at least one
more time. You then can decide if you want the calculator to
simplify the result step-by-step using simplification factors it
chooses or if you want the calculator to simplify the result
using the simplification factors that you choose.
Letting the Calculator Choose the Simplification Factor
After getting an unsimplified result (one with $ next to it) from
any fractional calculation, press B b. The simplified
result and simplification factor which the calculator chose are
displayed. For example, Fac=3 means simplification factor=3.
The Display Format mode settings affect whether a result is
displayed as a mixed number or a simple fraction.
1. Select Mansimp mode setting,
³
if necessary, and return to
the Home screen.
. # # # # "
b - l
3
2. Add 1 / + 2 /
4
In A§b/c
.
8
4
mode
: 1 < 3 = 4 " \
2 < 4 = 8 b
In b/c
mode
3. Let the calculator simplify
the result.
In A§b/c
mode
B b
In b/c
mode
Chapter 3: Fractions 63
Choosing the Simplification Factor
After getting an unsimplified result from any fractional
calculation, press B simplification_factor b, where
simplification_factor is a positive integer that you choose.
The Display Format mode settings affect whether a result is
displayed as a mixed number or as a simple fraction.
4
8
Add / + / and choose the simplification factor to reduce
16 16
the sum to lowest terms.
³
4
8
1. Enter / + /
16 16
.
- l :
4 = 1 6 " \ 8 =
1 6 b
2. Simplify by 2.
B 2 b
3. Simplify by 3.
B 3 b
The result did not
change. Try again
with another factor.
4. Simplify by 2.
B 2 b
Simplification is
complete.
Recalling the Factor - } 6:Factor
If you execute a fractional calculation in Mansimp mode and
then the user or the calculator simplifies the result, you can
recall the simplification factor at a later time by selecting
- } 6:Factor.
Since Factor is a variable, you can use Factor in expressions or
on any screen that accepts whole numbers (Y= editor, List
editor, Home screen, etc.).
64 Chapter 3: Fractions
Only one simplification factor (the last one calculated) is
stored in memory. Also, you can store a positive whole
number to Factor using the X key, just as you would store a
number to any variable. For more information about storing
values to variables, see Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73.
6
From the Home screen, simplify / by a factor of 2, and then
8
recall the factor.
³
1. Select Mansimp mode, if
necessary.
. # # # # "
b - l
2. Enter the fraction and
simplify.
: 6 = 8 B 2
b
3. Recall the simplification
factor, 2.
- } 6 b
Converting Between Fractions and
Decimals
To convert a fraction to a decimal or a decimal to a fraction,
use >. If a fractional equivalent of a decimal does not exist,
the calculator returns the same decimal number. Also, the
calculator only recognizes and converts (if possible) the first
ten digits of any decimal number.
You must follow > with b; otherwise, you get an error.
The current Decimal Notation mode determines the display of
the result. In the following example, the calculator is set to
Float Decimal Notation mode.
Chapter 3: Fractions 65
3
Convert / to a decimal and back to a fraction.
4
³
3
1. Convert / to a decimal.
4
- l :
3 = 4 > b
2. Convert .75 back to a
fraction.
In Autosimp
mode
> b
In Mansimp
mode
1
Add 2 plus the decimal equivalent of / .
4
³
1
/ =.25
4
2 \ 1 = 4 > b
Converting Between Mixed Numbers
and Simple Fractions
To convert a mixed number to a simple fraction or a simple
fraction to a mixed number use ?. The Display Format
mode settings do not affect the results when using ?.
You must follow ? with b; otherwise, you get an
error.
1
Convert 3 / to a simple fraction and back to a mixed number.
3
³
1
1. Convert 3 / to a simple
3
fraction.
- l :
3 < 1 = 3 ?
b
10
2. Convert / back to a
3
mixed number.
? b
66 Chapter 3: Fractions
Measurement
Conversions and
Constant
4
Calculations
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu...............................68
Length - ‚ 1 .................................................68
Area - ‚ 2 .....................................................68
Volume - ‚ 3 ................................................69
Time - ‚ 4.....................................................69
Temp (Temperature) - ‚ 5...........................69
MassàWeight - ‚ 6.......................................69
Speed - ‚ 7...................................................69
Converting a Unit of Measure......................................70
Constants .............................................................................71
Single Mode ..................................................................72
Multiple Mode ..............................................................75
68 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
The - ‚ CONVERSIONS Menu
Use this menu to access all conversion categories.
- ‚
1:Length
2:Area
Displays the LENGTH menu.
Displays the AREA menu.
3:Volume
4:Time
Displays the VOLUME menu.
Displays the TIME menu.
5:Temp
Displays the TEMPERATURE menu.
Displays the MASS/WT. menu.
Displays the SPEED menu.
6:MassàWeight
7:Speed
Length - ‚ 1
mm........... millimeters
cm ............ centimeters
m.............. meters
ft .................... feet
yard................ yards
km.................. kilometers
mile................ miles
inch .......... inches
Area - ‚ 2
ft2 ............. square feet
m2 ............ square meters
mi2............ square miles
in2 .................. square inches
cm2................. square centimeters
yd2 ................. square yards
km2 .......... square kilometers ha................... hectares
acre .......... acres
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 69
Volume - ‚ 3
liter ........... liters
in3...................cubic inches
ft3 ...................cubic feet
m3...................cubic meters
galUK .............UK gallons
ozUK ..............UK ounces
gal ............ gallons
qt.............. quarts
pt.............. pints
oz ............. ounces
cm3 ........... cubic centimeters
Time - ‚ 4
sec............ seconds
min ........... minutes
hr.............. hours
day .................days
week...............weeks
year ................years
Temp (Temperature) - ‚ 5
degC......... degrees Celsius
degF ......... degrees Fahrenheit
degK......... degrees Kelvin
MassàWeight - ‚ 6
g............... grams
kg ............. kilograms
lb .............. pounds
ton (US) ..........tons
mton (US) .......metric tons
Speed - ‚ 7
ftàs ........... feet per second
kmàhr......... kilometers per hour
màs .......... meters per second knot............ knots
miàhr ........ miles per hour
70 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
Converting a Unit of Measure
To convert a measurement value, enter the measurement
value, select the category from the CONVERSIONS menu, select
the unit you are converting from, and then the unit you are
converting to. To know which category to select, look at the
units of the original value. You can only convert within one
category.
measurement_value current_unit 4 new_unit
Convert 50 meters to inches.
³
1. Clear the Home screen, if
desired. Enter the value, 50.
- l : 5 0
2. Display the CONVERSIONS
menu.
- ‚
3. Select the applicable
category, 1:LENGTH.
1
4. Select the current unit,
meters.
The current unit
is displayed.
3
5. Select the unit which you
want to convert to, inches.
m8 inch is pasted
to the Home screen.
4
6. Calculate the result.
b
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 71
EOS operating rules (Appendix B: Reference Information)
apply when converting negative measurements as shown in
the next example.
Compare the results of M5¡F4¡ C and (M5)¡F4¡ C.
³
1. From the Home screen,
calculate M5¡F4¡ C.
- l :
a 5 - ‚ 5
2 1 b
The calculator converts 5¡F to ¡C
and then returns the negative of the
result.
2. Calculate (M5)¡F4¡ C..
- £ - !
- m D " "
- m E b
The calculator converts (M5)¡F to ¡C.
Constants
To save time re-entering long or complicated expressions and
to help prevent entry errors, you can enter numbers,
expressions, lists, commands, or functions into the
calculator’s memory by defining them as constants in the Set
Constant editor. As constants, they then can be recalled at any
time.
You can define up to four constants in the Set Constant editor
and choose from one of two different modes: Single or Multiple.
The mode you select determines how many of the constants
you can recall at a time. To enter a constant in the editor,
select the mode from the Set Constant editor (- †), move
the cursor to one of the four constants, and define it.
- †
72 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
To use a constant:
1. Define the constant in the Set Constant editor (- †).
2. Recall the constant with the @ key.
Single Mode
By selecting Single mode, you tell the calculator that you only
want to access one constant from the list, even if more than
one is defined.
To select the one constant (C1, C2, C3, or C4) you want to use,
highlight the = next to it, and then press b. This
automatically deselects any other defined constants.
Defining Constants in Single Mode
Enter the constants in the Set Constant editor as shown in the
following example. At any time you can enter this editor and
edit, delete, or add constants.
1
Define C1 = + / and C3 = ¦ / .
1
2
2
³
1. Enter the Set Constant
editor.
- †
2. Highlight Single with the
cursor, if necessary.
$ b
1
3. Define C1 as + / .
2
# \ 1 = 2
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 73
1
4. Define C3 as ¦ / .
2
# #
M 1 = 2
The most recently entered
5. Exit the Set Constant editor.
constant (C3) remains
selected.
- l
Single Mode Constant Calculations
After a constant is defined and selected, return to the screen
where you want to use it in a calculation. Pressing @
pastes it to the cursor location. In Single mode, only one
defined constant is available for use in calculations, and an
expression using a constant is automatically solved after
pressing @ (without pressing b).
1
You recognize that C1=+ / .
2
1
³
Calculate 40+ / .
2
1. Select Single mode, if
necessary.
- † $ b
2. Select C1 (which deselects
C3), and exit the Set
Constant editor.
# ! b - l
3. Clear the Home screen, if
desired. Solve the problem
using C1.
Count=1.
: 4 0 @
Recalling a Constant in a Series of Calculations
When pressing @ more than once in a series of
calculations, the calculator automatically keeps count for you
(shown in the following example) unless the defined constant
includes a list. The counter starts over any time a new entry
precedes @, including Ans.
74 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
Find the multiple of 2 so that 5 ¦ 2n=40.
³
The calculator’s constant counter
automatically computes n.
Constant mode = Single
Set Cn = ¦ 2
n
5¦2 =40
1. Select Single mode, if
necessary.
- † $ b
2. Enter C2 = ¦ 2.
# # M 2
Other defined constants are
deselected automatically.
3. Return to the Home screen
and clear, if desired.
- l :
5 Q 2 is calculated automatically.
4. Count the number of times
you have to multiply 5 by 2
to get 40 (so that 5 Q 2n=40).
Count=1
5 @
@
Pressing @ a second time
acts like - ¢ @.
@
n=3 because you
multiplied by 2 three
times in a row.
5¦2¦2¦2=40, or
3
Solution
5¦2 =40
n=3
Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants 75
Multiple Mode
In Multiple mode, all defined constants are available to use at
any time. To define Multiple mode, highlight Multiple using the
cursor keys, and then press b.
Defining Constants in Multiple Mode
You define constants in Multiple mode exactly the same way
you define them in Single mode. All constants are always
selected, even if they are not defined.
Select Multiple mode and use the constants defined in the
previous examples.
³
1. Enter the Set Constant
editor.
- †
2. Select Multiple mode.
$ " b
All constants are
now selected.
Recalling Constants in Multiple Mode
When you press @ from the Home screen and the Set
Constant editor is in Multiple mode, the first six characters of
every defined constant is displayed. Undefined constants are
marked as Empty.
@
76 Chapter 4: ConversionsàConstants
To select a constant, press the number associated with the
constant (1, 2, 3, or 4). You may choose another constant (or
the same one) by pressing @ again. In Multiple mode
(unlike in Single mode), your constant expression is not
evaluated until you press b.
Define C3=+3¦2 and C4=¦2+3 in Multiple mode.
³
- † $ " b
# # # :
\ 3 M 2 # :
M 2 \ 3
You recognize that C3=+3¦2.
Calculate 4+3¦2.
³
1. Go to the Home screen and
clear it, if desired.
- l :
2. Find the result.
4 @ 3 b
Press b to evaluate
the expression.
You recognize that C4=¦2+3.
Calculate 4¦2+3.
³
4 @ 4 b
Lists
5
Steps for Creating a List ......................................................78
The List Editor 3 ............................................................79
Naming a List.......................................................................79
Entering List Elements.........................................................81
Editing Lists in the List Editor .............................................87
Inserting or Deleting a New List ..................................87
Deleting Lists from Calculator Memory.......................88
Inserting or Deleting One Element in a List................89
Editing an Existing Element .........................................89
Clearing All Elements in a List......................................90
Clearing All Elements in All Lists..................................90
Editing a List Formula...................................................90
The - v Ls Menu .........................................................91
The - v OPS Menu......................................................92
SortA( and SortD( - v " 1 and 2 ......................93
ClrList - v " 3 ....................................................95
dim( - v " 4.......................................................95
@List( - v " 5 .....................................................97
Select( - v " 6 ...................................................98
seq( - v " 7........................................................99
augment( - v " 8............................................100
¨ (List Signifier) - v " 9.................................101
List Commands from the Home Screen............................102
Creating a List .............................................................102
Copying One List to Another .....................................103
Displaying One List Element.......................................103
Inserting or Changing a List Element ........................104
Using Math Functions with Lists ................................105
78 Chapter 5: Lists
Steps for Creating a List
On the TIN73, a set of numerical or text information is called a
list. Follow these basic steps when defining a list.
3
Display the List editor.
- t
(to name a list)
Name the list you want to define, or
use a prenamed list (L1-L6).
Prenamed lists, ¨5 and
¨6, and one user-named
list, ¨PET.
number keys
or
- t
Enter list elements
(numerical or text).
Note: Surround text elements
with quotation marks.
- m,
:,
or /
Edit list as necessary.
Chapter 5: Lists 79
The List Editor 3
You can enter up to 20 lists in the List editor. Each list can
have up to 999 elements. You can only display three lists at the
same time; use " or ! to scroll to see all other defined lists.
List notation looks like this: L5={1,2,3,4,5,6}. Read it as “elements
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are stored in the list named L5.”
Entries in each column display the
List name across top
first 6 characters of the element.
List counter
(cursor is in
3
the 1st list).
Entry line
L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, and one empty, unnamed list initially are
included in the List editor.
Numeric Notation, Decimal Notation, and Angle modes affect
the display of an element (except fractional elements).
Fractions are unaffected by
Numeric Notation mode.
Calculator is in
Sci Numeric
3
Notation mode.
Highlighted element
is displayed on entry
Naming a List
line in its entirety.
When you are ready to define your list, you can move to one of
the columns labeled L1- L6 and begin entering your list
elements.
80 Chapter 5: Lists
If you do not want to use L1-L6 (you cannot rename them), you
can create a new list and name it anything you want. A list
name can be one to five characters long. The first character
must be a letter from A to Z. The second through fifth
characters can be any combination of letters and numbers.
Access letters from the Text editor (- t). A list accepts
elements only after it is named.
Note: You cannot rename a user-named list, but you can copy
its elements to a list with a different name. See the section
entitled, “Copying One List to Another” on page 103.
In this guidebook, when a list name is referred to, its name is
always preceded by the ¨ symbol; however, you don’t type the
¨ when naming a list in the List editor.
If a defined list name is highlighted, the list elements or the
attached formula are displayed on the entry line.
Create a list named NUM.
³
1. Display the List editor.
Or, insert a blank list. Highlight
a list name and press - m.
3
2. Scroll to the blank,
unnamed list to the far right
of the List editor.
" or !
3. Use the Text editor to name
the list NUM.
- t
N b U b
M b Done b
NUM appears on
the entry line.
4. Move “NUM” from the entry
line to the list name line.
¨NUM now
accepts
b
elements.
Chapter 5: Lists 81
Entering List Elements
A named list accepts two types of elements: numerical and
text.
•
•
Lists that contain numerical elements not enclosed in
quotation marks are called numerical lists.
Lists that contain text elements or numerical elements
whose numerical values are ignored (because they are
enclosed in quotation marks) are called categorical lists.
To enter an element, highlight the space in the column under
the list name where you want the element to be entered (you
can’t skip any spaces) and type in the element (it is displayed
on the entry line). Press b or # to move the element into
the list. Pressing # or b also moves the cursor to the next
element space.
Access the quotation marks (for categorical lists) from the
Text editor (- t).
Numerical Lists
Numerical lists contain real numbers, fractions, or expressions
that evaluate to real numbers or fractions. If you enter an
expression like sin(30), the calculator displays the decimal
equivalent in the list element space. The Numeric Notation,
Decimal Notation, and Angle modes determine how the
calculator displays all elements, except fractions.
Define ¨NUM={18,25,45}.
³
1. Go to the first element
space of the numerical list
¨NUM.
3
" (as necessary)
# (if necessary)
82 Chapter 5: Lists
2. Enter the list elements.
1 8 # 2 5 # 4 5 #
Entering Fractional Elements
When entering fractions from the Home screen, parentheses
are optional around the numerator and denominator.
When entering fractions in the List editor (and any other
editor), parentheses are mandatory around the numerator and
denominator ONLY when operators are included:
3 1 \ 2 = 3 \ 4
b
Interpreted as
1+(2/3)+4
D 1 \ 2 E =
D 3 \ 4 E b
Using parentheses
Chapter 5: Lists 83
Dependent Numerical Lists
The numerical list described in the previous section (¨NUM) is
an independent list. You also can create dependent lists,
which are dependent (or based) upon the contents of another
defined numerical list.
You create a dependent list by attaching a formula to it. For
example, "2 + L1," where L1 is already defined, is a formula. The
formula always contains at least one other list. In addition, for
a formula like L3="2+L1+ L2," L1 and L2 must have the same
number of elements. Then, each element in L3 is the result of
the attached formula.
When a formula is attached to a list, a small signifier (2)
appears next to the list name. You cannot edit a dependent list
by simply typing over an element as with independent lists.
You must highlight the element you want to change, press
b, and then edit it. However, this changes the entire list
back to an independent list, and the formula and the formula
signifier disappear.
Also, it is possible to have multiple dependent lists all based
on the same list (for example, L2="2+ L1," L3="3+L1," and
L4="4+L1").
An attached formula can be enclosed in quotation marks
(located in the Text editor). A list whose formula:
•
•
Is not enclosed in quotation marks is not automatically
updated if the independent list changes.
Is enclosed in quotation marks is automatically updated if
the independent list changes.
Convert the following six Celsius temperatures
{M40,M15,M5,30,58,140} to Fahrenheit and display both lists in the
List editor.
³
¨CEL={M40,M15,M5,30,58,140}
¨FRHT="¨CEL degC8degF"
Independent List
Dependent List
84 Chapter 5: Lists
1. Create the independent list,
¨CEL.
3
" or " (as necessary
to move to the blank
list)
- t C b E
b L b Done
b b
2. Enter the elements.
# a 4 0 # a 1 5 # a 5
# 3 0 # 5 8 # 1 4 0 #
3. Create the dependent list,
¨FRHT.
" - t
F b R bH b
T bDone b
b
4. Attach the formula "¨CEL
degC8degF" to ¨FRHT.
b - t
" b D o n e b
- vCEL b
- ‚ 5
1
2
- t " b
A small formula
Done b
signifier appears.
5. Display the elements of
¨FRHT.
b
Chapter 5: Lists 85
6. Change M5 in ¨CEL to M8.
! # # b a 8
b
Note: Since the formula is enclosed
in quotation marks, element 3 in
¨FRHT is automatically updated.
Categorical Lists
Categorical lists usually contain words or letters (text
elements). If they contain numerical elements, the numerical
values of those elements are ignored. Categorical lists are
usually used in statistical plotting, but they can allow you to
label elements as explained in the following example. See
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots for details about using categorical
lists in stat plots.
To define a categorical list, enclose the first element in
quotation marks (found in the Text editor). Quotation marks
are optional on the remaining text elements. A categorical list
signifier, c, appears next to the list name.
A math class has 4 test scores: 2 tests, 1 midterm test, and 1
final exam. Ivan earned test scores of 85, 80, 74, and 82. Karen
earned test scores of 90, 85, 92, and 79. Reflect this
information in the List editor.
³
1 Categorical
2 Numerical
¨TEST={TEST1,TEST2,MDTRM,FINAL}
¨IVAN={85,80,74,82}
¨KAREN={90,85,92,79}
86 Chapter 5: Lists
1. Display the List editor and
create a list named TEST.
3 " or ! (as
necessary to move to
the blank list)
- t
T b E b
S b T b
Done b b
2. Enter the element TEST1.
# - t " b
T b E b
S b T b 1
" b Done
The categorical
list signifier, c.
b b
3. Repeat for the elements
TEST2, MDTRM, and FINAL
(quotation marks are
optional after the first
element).
4. Create a list named IVAN.
" - t
I b V b
A b N b
Done b b
5. Enter 85, 80, 74, and 82.
# 8 5 # 8 0 # 7 4 #
8 2 #
Chapter 5: Lists 87
6. Create a list named KAREN.
" - t
K b A b
R b E b
N b Done b
b
7. Enter 90, 85, 92, and 79.
# 9 0 # 8 5 # 9 2 #
7 9 #
Once you have these lists entered, you can display this data in
various ways using related features on the calculator. For
example, Chapter 6: Statistical Plots explains how you could
easily convert this data into a bar chart. Chapter 7: Statistical
Analyses explains ways to find each student’s averages as well
as doing other statistical analyses of their test scores.
Editing Lists in the List Editor
From the List editor, you can display, edit, insert, temporarily
delete (not from memory), and move from view all lists stored
in the calculator. You also can edit, insert, move, or delete list
elements and attached formulas.
To see all list names that are stored into the calculator’s
memory (but not necessarily the List editor), display the
- v Ls menu and use $ and # to scroll the menu.
Inserting or Deleting a New List
Inserting a list into the List editor saves it in the calculator’s
memory. However, deleting a list from the List editor does not
delete it from the calculator’s memory. A deleted list’s name
still appears in the - v Ls menu.
Therefore, if you would like to insert the deleted list back into
the List editor, go to a blank list, select the list name from
- v Ls menu and press b b.
88 Chapter 5: Lists
Insert L1 between L4 and L5.
³
1. Move the cursor so that it
highlights L5.
3 $
" or ! (as necessary)
2. Insert a blank list.
- m
3. Identify it as L1.
If elements exist
in L1, then those
appear also.
- v 1 b
³
Delete L1.
/
Deleting Lists from Calculator Memory
To delete a list from the calculator’s memory, use the
- Ÿ 4:Delete menu. If you delete L1–L6 from the
calculator’s memory, the names still appear in the - v Ls
menu. If you delete a user-named list, its name is deleted from
this menu.
Chapter 5: Lists 89
Delete L2 from the calculator’s
memory.
³
- Ÿ 4 3 # b
- l (to return to
the Home screen)
Inserting or Deleting One Element in a List
To insert one element in a list:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element
space where you want to insert the element.
2. Press - m to insert the element space. All following
elements move down one space.
3. Type the element, and press b.
To delete one element from a list:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element
that you want to delete.
2. Press / to delete the element. All following elements
move up one space.
Editing an Existing Element
You can edit any particular element in a list without having to
reenter the entire list.
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the element
that you want to edit.
2. Press b to move the element to the entry line.
3. Edit the element with - m, :, or /, as
necessary.
4. Press b to replace the existing element with the
edited element.
90 Chapter 5: Lists
Clearing All Elements in a List
To clear all of the elements in a list when the List editor is
displayed:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the list
name. The list elements (or formula) are displayed on the
entry line.
2. Press : b to clear the list elements.
You also can clear elements from the Home screen using the
- v OPS 3:ClrList menu item.
Clearing All Elements in All Lists
You clear all elements in all lists using the - Ÿ 6:ClrAllLists
instruction from the Home screen. When you press b, all
elements in all lists are cleared from the calculator’s memory,
even for those lists not displayed in the List editor.
- l
- Ÿ 6 b
Editing a List Formula
To edit an attached formula:
1. Use the cursor keys as necessary to highlight the name of
the list name that you want to edit.
2. Press b to move the formula to the entry line.
3. Edit the formula with - m, :, or /, as
necessary.
4. Press b to replace the existing formula with the
edited formula. The list elements are updated
automatically according to the new formula.
Chapter 5: Lists 91
Deleting a List Formula
You can delete an attached formula in one of two ways. You
can:
•
•
Follow the preceding directions for editing a formula, but
press : b in place of step 3.
Edit one of the elements in the dependent list as directed
in the steps for editing an element. When you are
finished, the formula signifier disappears, and the list
becomes independent.
The - v Ls Menu
Use the - v Ls (lists) menu to access all list names
stored in the calculator’s memory. L1-L6 are listed first
followed by all user-named lists in alphabetical order. In this
menu, the user-named lists appear as they do in the List editor
(the List signifier, ¨, does not precede the name). However, if
you select a list to display it anywhere else on the calculator,
such as the on Home screen, the ¨ automatically appears
before the name.
- v
User-named lists follow
¨1-¨6 in alphabetical order.
From the Home screen, you can type in a new list name
directly using the Text editor (except for L1- L6); however, you
must precede the list name with the list signifier, ¨. Notice that
the list signifier, ¨, is smaller than the L in the Text editor. You
can access ¨ by itself from - | or under the
- v OPS menu.
If you try to use the L from the Text editor, the calculator
reads that L plus any following characters as variables
(representing numerical values), not as a list.
92 Chapter 5: Lists
The - v OPS Menu
Use the - v OPS (options) menu to change defined lists
from the Home screen.
- v "
1:SortA(
Sorts list elements from lowest to highest
in numerical order or in alphabetical order.
(Ascending)
2:SortD(
Sorts list elements from highest to lowest
(Descending) in numerical order or in reverse
alphabetical order.
3:ClrList
4:dim(
Clears all elements in specified list(s).
Recalls, sets, or changes the dimension
(number of elements) in a list.
5:@List(
Returns the differences between
consecutive elements in a list.
6:Select(
Selects one or more specific data points
from a Scatter or xyLine stat plot, and then
updates the list(s) in memory. (Requires
you to set up a statistical plot. See Chapter
6: Statistical Plots for more information.)
7:seq(
Returns a list that fulfills the requirements
of 5 arguments (expression, variable,
begin, end, and increment) which you
specify.
8:augment(
Combines two lists to make a new list.
9:¨
List signifier; all text characters or numbers
following it are interpreted as a list name.
Chapter 5: Lists 93
SortA( and SortD( - v " 1 and 2
SortA( (sort ascending) sorts numerical list elements from
lowest to highest value and categorical list elements
alphabetically. SortD( (sort descending) sorts the list elements
from highest to lowest value or in reverse alphabetical order.
Enter the SortA( or SortD( instruction on the Home screen; and
then enter all list names that you want to sort (separated by a
comma), and press b.
Sorting One List
SortA(list)
SortD(list)
Define L2={4,7,3,9} in the List editor, and sort in ascending
order.
³
1. Define L2 in the List editor.
3
2. From the Home screen, sort
L2 in ascending order.
- l :
- v " 1
- v 2 E b
3. If desired, display L2 on the
Home screen or in the List
editor to see the new order.
On the Home screen
- v 2 b
– or –
3
" (as necessary)
In the List editor
94 Chapter 5: Lists
Sorting Multiple Lists
You can specify more than one list when using SortA( and
SortD(. In this case, the first list specified is the independent
one; any following lists are dependent.
The calculator sorts the independent list first, and then sorts
all the dependent lists by placing their elements in the same
order as their corresponding elements in the independent list.
This allows you to keep sets of related data in the same order
when you sort lists.
SortA(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2ꢀ)
SortD(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2ꢀ)
Define L2={3,4,7,9} (independent), L3={1,2,3,4} (dependent), and
³
L4={14,13,12,11} (dependent), and sort all three in descending
order.
1. Define L2, L3, and L4 in the
List editor.
3
2. From the Home screen,
sort the lists in descending
order.
- l :
- v " 2
- v 2 ¡
¨2{9} still corresponds
- v 3 ¡
- v 4 E b
to L3{4} and L4{11}
and so on.
3. If desired, display the
elements in the List editor
to see the new order.
3
" (as necessary)
Chapter 5: Lists 95
ClrList - v " 3
Clears all items in specified list(s) from the Home screen.
ClrList list1[,list2,list3,...]
From the Home screen, clear L1
³
and L2.
- l :
- v " 3
- v 1 ¡ - v 2
b
dim( - v " 4
Use dim( from the Home screen to return the dimension
(number of elements) of a defined list, to create a new list
with a specified number of elements, or to change the
dimension of a defined list.
When creating a new list with a specified dimension, you
can assign a length from 1 to 999. The elements are set to
zeros.
When changing the dimension of a defined list, all existing
elements in the defined list within the new dimension are not
changed.
•
•
If you are increasing the number of elements, extra list
elements are filled by 0.
If you are decreasing the number of elements, all existing
elements in the defined list outside the new dimension
are deleted.
To return the dimension of a list:
dim(list)
96 Chapter 5: Lists
To create a new list with a specific dimension:
dimension#Xdim(newList)
To change the dimension of an existing list:
newDimension#Xdim(list)
Define L5={1,2,3,4} in the List
³
editor.
3
From the Home screen, return
the dimension of L5.
³
- l :
- v " 4
- v 5 E b
There are 4
elements in L5.
Create a new list, ¨NEW, with 4
elements.
³
1. Define the list on the Home
screen.
4 X - v " 4
- v " 9
- t
N b E b
W b Done b E
b
2. Display the elements in
¨NEW on the Home screen, if
desired.
- v NEW b
b
Chapter 5: Lists 97
³
1. Change the dimension of
¨NEW to 3 elements.
3 X - v " 4
- v NEW b
E b
2. Display the elements in
¨NEW, if desired.
- v N E W b
b
@List( - v " 5
@List( (delta list) returns a list containing the differences
between consecutive elements in a list. It subtracts the first
element in the list from the second element, subtracts the
second element from the third, and so on. The resulting list is
always one element shorter than the original list.
@List(list)
Define L6={9,7,4,3} and calculate
³
its @List.
1. Enter the elements in the
List editor.
3
7-9=M2
4-7=M3
2. From the Home screen,
calculate @List for L6.
3-4=M1
- l :
- v " 5
- v 6 E b
98 Chapter 5: Lists
Select( - v " 6
This instruction is used to select a certain portion of an
existing Scatter or xyLine stat plot, both of which contain an
XList and a YList. Before you can use Select(, you must define
and select (turn on) the statistical plot you want to use;
otherwise, you get an error message. For a detailed
explanation on setting up Scatter and xyLine plots, see
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
From the Home screen, enter Select( followed by two list
names, XList and YList. These list names are where you want
to store the selected data points. All X-values are stored in the
first list and all Y-values are stored in the second list.
XList and YList can be the same two lists as the ones which
set up the stat plot, or you can enter new list names. If you
choose to enter new list names, entering the list signifier (¨)
(found under the - v OPS menu) is optional. Enter the
new list names using the Text editor (- t).
Select(XList,YList)
The calculator displays the stat plot and prompts you to select
the left and the right bounds. The calculator then plots the
selected points on the Graph screen for you to see. If desired,
you can enter the List editor to see the lists with the selected
data points.
The following example shows the steps you would follow
when selecting a statistical plot. The data is acquired from a
sample statistical xyLine plot. ¨TIME contains 94 X-values; ¨DIST
contains 94 Y-values.
The example selects the first portion of the graph before
Distance=0 and stores the selected X-values in ¨NEWT and the
selected Y-values in ¨NEWD.
1. Display the graph or stat
plot and determine the data
points you want to select.
*
Chapter 5: Lists 99
2. The Select( command and
two new list names are
entered from the Home
screen.
- v " 9 accesses the list
signifier. - t accesses the
Text editor.
3. The left bound is chosen.
Left bound
b
4. The right bound is chosen.
Right bound
" (as necessary)
b
5. The plot is regraphed to
include only the selected
data points.
¨NEWT and ¨NEWD now exist in the calculator’s memory. To
display newly selected lists in the List editor, insert them as
you would insert any other list.
seq( - v " 7
seq( returns a list in which each element is the result of the
evaluation of expression with regard to the variable. You also
must specify a value range from begin to end. You can specify
one optional argument, increment, which specifies the
interval between each variable value used to solve expression.
variable need not be defined in memory. increment can be
negative. The default value for increment is 1. seq( is not valid
within expressions.
seq(expression,variable,begin,end[,increment])
100 Chapter 5: Lists
Solve expression, A2, with regard to variable, A. Use variable
values ranging from 1 (begin) to 11 (end), and specify
increment as 3.
³
1. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
2. Enter the seq( expression.
- v " 7
- t A b 6 ¡
A b Done b ¡
1 ¡ 1 1 ¡ 3 E b
{12,42,72,102}
augment( - v " 8
augment( combines the elements of two lists from the Home
screen to create a new list. An augmented list is not saved in
the calculator’s memory unless you name it or store it to an
existing list name. This is shown in the following example.
augment(list1,list2)
Define L4={1,2,3} and L5={3,4,5,6} in the List editor, augment L4
³
with L5 and store the augmented list to L6.
1. Define L4 and L5.
3
2. Return to the Home screen,
and augment L4 and L5.
- l :
- v " 8
- v 4 ¡
- v 5 E b
Chapter 5: Lists 101
3. Store the augmented list to
L6.
- ¢ X - v
6 b
Press 3 to view L6
in the List editor.
¨ (List Signifier) - v " 9
The list signifier, ¨, which is not the same as the L from the
Text editor, is especially useful in programming when you
want to specify a group of numbers or text characters as a list
name.
¨listname
The list signifier does not appear in front of a list name in the
List editor or in the - v Ls menu because it is obvious
which groups of text characters or numbers are list names.
Also, the list signifier is optional when entering commands
that take only list names for arguments. For example,
Select(XList,YList)
Although XList and YList are not preceded by the list
signifier, the calculator interprets them as list names since no
other types of arguments are accepted.
Also, when defining lists from the Home screen, the list
signifier is optional.
{1,2,3}XABC
Since this command structure is only used with list names, the
calculator interprets ABC as ¨ABC.
102 Chapter 5: Lists
List Commands from the Home Screen
You can create, copy, display, and edit lists directly from the
Home screen. You also can perform mathematical functions
on lists from the Home screen.
Creating a List
To create a list on the Home screen, you must enter the list
elements surrounded by braces and store them to the list
name. You can access the braces from the Text editor
(- t) or from the CATALOG (- |).
If you create a list on the Home screen, it is stored in the
calculator’s memory, but it won’t show up in the List editor
unless you specifically insert it there.
{element1,element2,ꢀ}Xlist
Define ¨ABC={1,2,3} on the Home screen.
³
1. Enter the elements.
- l :
- t
{ b 1 ¡ 2 ¡ 3 }
b Done b
List braces { }
2. Store to the list name.
X - t
A b B b
C b Done b
b
Chapter 5: Lists 103
Copying One List to Another
To copy a list on the Home screen, store it to another list
name.
It is easiest to store the elements in the List editor. You then
can review the results in the List editor. Otherwise, any lists
you create on the Home screen are stored in memory, but they
don’t appear in the List editor unless you insert them there.
listXnewList
Define L1={1,2,3} and L2={4,5,6} and copy L1 to L2.
³
1. Enter the new elements.
3
2. Return to the Home screen
and copy L1 to L2.
- l :
- v 1 X
- v 2 b
3. Display the copied list in
the List editor.
3
Displaying One List Element
From the Home screen, you can display one list element from
a defined list.
list(element#)
104 Chapter 5: Lists
Define L2={1,2,3} in the List editor
and display the second element
from the Home screen.
³
1. Define L2.
3
2. Display the 2nd element
only.
- l :
- v 2 D 2 E b
Inserting or Changing a List Element
From the Home screen, you can insert or change elements in a
defined list. You can only insert elements in order. For
example, you can’t insert a 3rd element if the 2nd and 1st
elements are not defined.
Define L1={1,2,3} and insert a fourth element, 6. Then change
the 4th element from 6 to 8.
³
1. Define L1 in the List editor.
3 .
2. Return to the Home screen,
and insert a 4th element, 6.
- l :
6 X - v 1
D 4 E b
3. Display results in the List
editor, if desired.
3
Chapter 5: Lists 105
4. Change the 4th element, 6,
to 8.
- l 8 X
- v 1 D 4 E b
5. Display results in the List
editor, if desired.
3
Using Math Functions with Lists
When a math function (see Chapter 2: Math Operations) is
applied to a list, it is calculated for every element in the list.
Therefore, the function must be valid for every element in the
list.
You cannot perform a mathematical function on two lists of
different sizes. For example, {1,2,3}+{4,5,6,7} results in an error.
Mathematical rules always apply; for example, 1P{0,1,2} results
in an error because 1 cannot be divided by 0.
Perform mathematical functions with L5 and L6 on the Home
screen.
³
1. Define L5={4,5,6} and
L6={7,8,9}.
3
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate L5+ L6.
{4,5,6}+{7,8,9}=
- l :
- v 5 \
{4+7, 5+8, 6+9}=
{11,13,15}
- v 6 b
106 Chapter 5: Lists
2
3. Calculate L5 .
- v 5 6 b
L52=
{42, 52, 62}=
{16,25,36}
4. Select Radian mode setting
and calculate cos(L6).
. # # " b
- l :
- u 3
Use " to scroll to
see the entire
answers.
- v 6 E b
For more information, see Chapter 11:
Trigonometry.
6
Statistical Plots
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot ...........................................108
Defining Statistical Data in Lists .......................................109
Deselecting Y Functions..................................................109
n
Defining a Stat Plot...........................................................109
Selecting Stat Plot Types ...................................................111
Defining Stat Plot Options................................................112
Adjusting Window Values and Format ............................114
Displaying the Stat Plot.....................................................114
Stat Plot Examples .............................................................114
Scatter Plot Ô and xyLine Plot Ó........................114
Pictograph Î............................................................117
Bar Graph Ð .............................................................118
Pie Chart Ï ................................................................120
Histogram Ò ...........................................................121
Box Plot Ö...............................................................123
Modified Box Plot Õ ..............................................124
108 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
Steps for Defining a Stat Plot
Follow these basic steps when defining a statistical plot. You
may not have to do all of them each time you graph the
designated lists.
3
Define numerical and categorical
lists in the List editor.
- } 2 6
Deselect Yn functions, if desired.
- e
1, 2, or 3
Define the stat plot by entering the
STAT PLOTS menu and selecting
Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3.
" b
'
Turn on the stat plot,
select the Plot Type and define
all corresponding options.
Adjust the WINDOW values and
format, if necessary.
Graph the stat plot. Trace the plot
*
( 7
or )
with ), if desired.
Using ZoomStat
WINDOW values.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 109
Defining Statistical Data in Lists
Statistical plots (stat plots) are graphical representations of
data that has been stored in lists. Therefore, since you need to
create your lists before you can define stat plots, review
Chapter 5: Lists for information on naming and creating both
numerical and categorical lists.
Note: All examples in this chapter assume that you know how
to enter lists in the List editor.
Deselecting Yn Functions
When you press * or a ( command, the calculator
graphs all selected Yn functions (defined in the Y= editor) and
graphs all stat plots that are defined and turned on. If you have
defined and selected functions in the Y= editor and you don’t
want them displayed with your stat plots, deselect all defined
functions with - } 2:Y-Vars 6:FnOff.
For more information on defining and selecting functions in
the Y= editor, see Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
Defining a Stat Plot
Once you have data lists stored in the calculator, you need to
define the stat plot. This requires two steps:
1. Press - e to display the STAT PLOTS menu screen.
2. Select 1, 2, or 3 to enter the Stat Plot editor for Plot1, Plot2,
or Plot3. Selecting 4 or 5 turns all stat plots off or on when
you graph.
110 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
The Stat Plot Menu Screen
- e
PlotsOff and PlotsOn - e 4 and 5
From the STAT PLOTS menu, you can choose to turn all stat
plots off or on. This determines whether or not they are
displayed on the Graph screen when you press * or select
a ( command. The TIN73 can graph all three stat plots at
the same time, if desired. If you select either of these
commands, the calculator returns you to the Home screen.
PlotsOff and PlotsOn accept three optional arguments, 1, 2 or 3,
which represent their corresponding stat plot. If you do not
include any arguments, the calculator automatically deselects
(turns off) or selects (turns on) all three.
PlotsOff [1,2,3]
PlotsOn [1,2,3]
³
Turn off Plot1 and Plot2.
- e 4
1 ¡ 2 b
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 111
The Stat Plot Editor
- e 1 , 2 or 3
If the plot has been defined previously, that information is
displayed when you select a plot number.
From the Stat Plot editor, you select (turn on) or deselect
(turn off) the stat plot, and you can select one of eight plot
types (represented as icons) as well as any options that go
with the type.
Selecting Stat Plot Types
To select a stat plot type, display the Stat Plot editor. Use $
and # to move to the Type line, and use " and ! to highlight
the individual Type icons. Once you have highlighted the Type
icon that you want, press b to select it. The options for
the plot type then are displayed automatically.
Icon
Ô
Plot Type
Scatter plot
xyLine plot
Pictograph
Bar graph
Icon
Ï
Plot Type
Pie chart
Ó
Ò
Ö
Õ
Histogram
Box plot
Î
Ð
Modified Box plot
112 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
Defining Stat Plot Options
The plot type you select determines which options you can
select. Therefore, when you select a different type, the options
adjust automatically, if necessary.
•
To specify a list name, use the - v Ls menu.
Highlight the list name you want with the cursor keys,
and then press b. The TIN73 inserts the name at the
cursor location.
•
•
To select an option, highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press b.
To enter a numerical value, use the number keys, and
then press b.
Remember that when entering elements in a categorical list,
you must surround the first element by quotation marks; they
are optional for the remaining elements.
The following table includes a list of all possible options for all
stat plot types. You only need to specify or select the options
which apply to the stat plot type you are defining.
For option:
Xlist
Do the following:
Specify a defined numerical list.
Ylist
Specify a defined numerical list. Ylist
must be the same length as Xlist and
can be the same as Xlist. Plots which
require you to specify both the Xlist
and Ylist plot points from those lists as
coordinate pairs.
Mark
Select one type (› , +, or ¦) to specify
appearance of data points or an
outlier (Modified Box plot) on the
graph screen.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 113
For option:
Do the following:
CategList
Specify a defined categorical list. List
dimension must be from 1 to 7 and
must be the same length as all
corresponding Data Lists.
Data List or
DataList#
Specify a defined numerical list. All
Data Lists must be the same length as
the corresponding CategList.
Scale
Specify a number which represents
the quantity of each Pictograph icon.
1Scale99999. Scale must be big
enough so that it cannot be broken up
into more than 7 icons. Using (
7:ZoomStat to display the stat plot
automatically adjusts Scale for you.
VertàHor
Select vertical or horizontal
orientation for Pictograph icons or
Bar graph bars.
Icons
1 2 3
Select one of 7 Icons to represent your
Pictograph: Æ, Ç, È, É, Ê, Ë, Ì.
Select number of bars you want
graphed per category in a Bar graph.
You must specify a corresponding Data
List for each bar included in the graph.
NumberàPercent
Select whether you want the values in
DataList to be displayed as numbers or
converted and displayed as
percentages in a Pie chart.
Freq (optional)
Default=1
Specify a frequency list that tells the
calculator how many times each data
point in Xlist occurs. Freq must have
the same number of elements as Xlist.
114 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
Adjusting Window Values and Format
If you press * to display all selected stat plots, sometimes
you see a blank screen. Try adjusting your viewing window.
The easiest way to do this is with the ( 7:ZoomStat
command. This adjusts the viewing window automatically so
that all points of all turned on stat plots are visible. To adjust
window values manually, press '.
In addition, the calculator automatically selects the AxesOff
option (- g) for Pictograph, Bar graph, Pie chart stat
plots. However, any other selected options on the - g
screen still apply to stat plots (as they do with function
graphs).
For more information on adjusting WINDOW values and
formatting the Graph screen, see Chapter 9: Function
Graphing.
Displaying the Stat Plot
Press * to display a stat plot. (Pressing * also
displays any Yn functions that are defined and selected.) Once
you have a plot displayed, you can press ) and use " and
! to move from point to point.
If you have more than one plot turned on at the same time, you
can trace all the points of each plot. Use $ and # to move
from plot to plot.
Stat Plot Examples
The following examples assume that all Yn functions are
deselected (turned off) (- } 2:Y-Vars 6:FnOff).
Scatter Plot Ô and xyLine Plot Ó
Scatter plots (Ô) and xyLine plots (Ó) are especially useful
for plotting data over a period of time to indicate trends. An
xyLine plot (Ó) functions exactly like the Scatter plot, except
that it connects the data points with a line.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 115
For the years 1978 -1984, determine in which baseball league,
North or South, the homerun leader tends to hit more home
runs. Use Scatter plots to find your solution.
³
Year
Home Runs
Year
Home Runs
NORTH SOUTH
NORTH SOUTH
1978
1979
1980
1981
40
48
48
31
46
45
41
22
1982
1983
1984
37
40
36
39
39
43
1. Create three lists in the List
editor, YEAR, NORTH, and
SOUTH.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all stat plots.
- e 4 b
3. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu.
- e
Select the Ô icon.
4. Define Plot1 as a Scatter
plot as shown to the right.
1 b # b #
- v YEAR b
# - v NORTH
b # b
5. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu.
- e
116 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
6. Define Plot2 as shown to the
right.
2 b # b #
- v YEAR b
# - v SOUTH
b # " b
Using different marks
helps you distinguish
between Plot1 and Plot2.
7. Display the stat plots using
the ZoomStat command.
( 7
8. Trace the Scatter plots to
find the solution to the
question.
The plot that is
being traced
)
! and " (to trace
point to point)
$ and # (to move
from plot to plot)
The X and Y coordinates
From 1978-1984, the North
League's home run hitter led in
4 of the 7 years.
Solution
Select the Ó icon.
9. Redefining Plot1 as an
xyLine plot makes it even
easier to follow the trends
of its data.
- e 1 # " b
10. Display Plot1 and Plot2 using
the ZoomStat command.
Trace, if desired.
( 7
) (optional)
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 117
Pictograph Î
In a Pictograph, an icon symbolizes the quantities being
represented. Pictographs are useful for observing changes in
quantity over time. They also can illustrate comparisons
between similar situations.
The calculator displays no more than seven Pictograph icons
for up to seven categories on the screen. Therefore, if Scale is
not big enough (meaning that Data List is broken up by more
than seven icons), you get an INVALID DIM error.
If an element in Data List is too large to fit the maximum scale
(99999) so that the calculator can’t make all icons fit in one
screen, you get a DOMAIN error.
For your geography class, you want to compare distances (in
kilometers) between Dallas, Texas, and seven other cities in
North America. Use a vertical Pictograph to display your
results.
³
City
km
City
km
Toronto, ON
2215
Denver, CO
1397
Mexico City, MX 1775
Los Angeles, CA 2180
Washington, DC 1927
Kansas City, KS 836
Vancouver, BC 3444
1. Create two lists in the List
editor, CITY and DIST.
Categorical list
Numerical list
Remember to surround the
first categorical list element
with quotation marks
(found in the Text editor).
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
118 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
2. Turn off all stat plots.
- e 4 b
3. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu.
- e
Select the Î
4. Define Plot1 as a Pictograph
as shown to the right.
icon.
1 b # " " b
# - v CITY
b # - v
MILES b # 5 0 0 #
b # b
5. Display the stat plots.
*
Highlighted
column
6. Trace, if desired.
)
As you press " and !, the calculator
highlights whole columns. Both list
names and list values are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
Dallas, TX, to Washington,
DC is 1,927 km.
Bar Graph Ð
A Bar graph plots a group of up to three data lists (converted
to bars) for comparison among one category. Bar graphs are
especially useful for comparing data lists (especially when
organized in categories) over a period of time.
The calculator adjusts all bars so that they fit within the
graphing screen. Therefore, the data list with the largest values
is scaled to fit the screen, and then all other bars are graphed
relative to it. Each element in CategList defines a category. You
can define up to seven categories with up to three data bars
per category.
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 119
The Xscl WINDOW value specifies the range of values for each
interval of a Bar graph. The Yscl WINDOW value specifies the
height of a bar in a Bar graph; in other words, it acts as your
bar scale. To adjust Xscl and Yscl manually, press ' and
enter the new values with the number keys. For more
information about setting WINDOW values, see Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
If you want the calculator to adjust the WINDOW values for you
automatically, press ( 7:ZoomStat.
Graph the data lists from the Scatter plot baseball example as
a vertical Bar graph (see that section in this chapter, if
necessary). Assign ¨YEAR as CategList, ¨NORTH as DataList1 and
¨SOUTH as DataList2. Ignore DataList3. (By default, L3 is assigned
to DataList3, but if another list name is assigned you don’t need
to change it.)
³
1. Turn off all stat plots.
- l :
- e 4 b
2. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu.
- e
Select the
3. Define Plot1 as a Bar graph
as shown to the right.
Ð icon.
1 b # " " "
b
4. Specify CategList, DataList1,
and DataList2.
# - v
Y E A R b #
- v NORTH
b # - v
SOUTH b
120 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
5. Select Vert and 2, if
necessary.
# # b " " "
b
6. Display the stat plots.
*
7. Trace the Bar graph, if
desired.
)
! and " (to trace bar
to bar)
DataList Name
and bar value
CategList
Pie Chart Ï
A Pie chart is used to compare parts of a whole. The area of a
“pie piece” is proportional to the part of 100% that it
represents. You can display up to seven “pie pieces.”
To trace the Pie chart with ), use " to trace clockwise
and ! to trace counterclockwise.
Keisha owns 4 cats, 5 dogs, 3 fish, 8 birds, and 14 snakes. Use a
percentage Pie chart to illustrate this.
³
1. Create two lists in the List
editor, PETS and AMNT.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all stat plots.
- e 4 b
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 121
3. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu and select Plot1.
- e 1 b
4. Define Plot1 as a Pie chart
as shown to the right.
# " " " " b #
- v PETS b #
- v AMNT b
# " b
A percentage
Pie chart
5. Display the stat plot.
*
8 birds is
6. Trace the Pie chart, if
desired.
23.529% of
the total pets
owned.
)
" and ! (to trace
from section to section)
Data List name
and section's
CategList
numerical value
Histogram Ò
Histograms are useful for representing data grouped in
intervals, and it plots the data’s frequency of occurrence for
each interval.
Thirty students recently took a math test. All scores between
100-90 are considered an A, 89-80 as a B, 79-70 as a C, 69-60 as
a D, 59-0 as an F. Use a Histogram to show the scores grouped
by their letter grade.
³
{99,96,92,88,84,78,74,70,66,64}
{1,2,3,5,2,7,4,3,2,1}
SCORE
FREQ
122 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
1. Create two lists in the List
editor, SCORE and FREQ.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all stat plots.
- e 4 b
3. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu.
- e
4. Define Plot1 as a Histogram
as shown to the right.
Select the
Ò icon.
1 b # " " " "
" b # - v
SCORE b #
- v FREQ b
5. Display the stat plot using
the ZoomStat command and
trace the Histogram.
( 7 )
! and " (to trace bar
to bar)
7 scores fall between
the min and max.
WINDOW values
6. Adjust the graphing window
so that the data is grouped
in intervals of 10 and so
from ZoomStat
that the lowest test score is
60 and the highest is 100.
The adjusted
WINDOW
values
' 6 0 # 1 0 0 # #
1 0 # 0 # 2 0 # 1
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 123
7. Graph and trace the
adjusted Histogram.
* )
" and ! (to trace bar
to bar)
14 scores fall
between 70-80.
Intervals=10
because Xscl=10
3 students received a D.
14 students received a C.
7 students received a B.
6 students received an A.
Solution
Box Plot Ö
A Box plot illustrates median applications of a data list. Lines
on the plot, called whiskers, extend from the minimum data
point in the set (minX) to the first quartile median point (Q1)
and from the third quartile median point (Q3) to the maximum
point (maxX). The middle vertical line is the median (Med) of all
the data points.
The first quartile contains all data points between minX and
Med; the third quartile contains all data points between Med
and maxX.
When two Box plots are plotted, the first one plots at the top
of the screen and the second plots in the middle. When three
are plotted, the first one plots at the top, the second in the
middle, and the third at the bottom.
Xmin and Xmax specify minimum and maximum X-axis values
when a Box plot is displayed on the Graph screen. Box plots
ignore Ymin and Ymax values. To adjust Xmin and Xmax
manually, press ' and enter the new values with the
number keys. If you want the calculator to adjust the window
values for you automatically, press ( 7:ZoomStat.
For more information about setting WINDOW values, see
Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
124 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
Graph the test scores data from the Histogram example as a
Box plot. (See previous section, if necessary.)
³
1. Turn off all stat plots.
- e 4 b
2. Display the Stat Plots menu.
- e
3. Define Plot1 as a Box plot as
shown to the right.
Select the
Ö icon.
1 b # " " " "
" " b # - v
SCORE b #
- v FREQ b
4. Display the stat plot using
the ZoomStat command.
( 7
5. Trace the Box plot.
)
! and " (to trace
point to point)
Q1 Median point and its value
Modified Box Plot Õ
The Modified Box plot functions exactly like the Box plot,
except it separates outliers from the plot. Outliers are those
data points which are 1.5¦Interquartile Range beyond the
quartiles. The Interquartile Range is defined as the difference
between the third quartile, Q3, and the first quartile, Q1.
Outliers are plotted individually beyond the whisker, using the
Mark you select from the Stat Plot editor. Outliers are included
in plot traces with ).
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots 125
Graph the test scores data from the Histogram and Box plot
examples as a Modified Box plot. (See those sections, if
necessary.) However, adjust SCORE and FREQ by inserting two
outlier data points: 112 and 40, both at a frequency of 1.
³
1. Edit SCORE and FREQ in the
List editor.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Turn off all STAT PLOTS.
- e 4 b
3. Display the STAT PLOTS
menu.
- e
4. Define Plot1 as a Modified
Box plot as shown to the
right.
Select the
Õ icon.
1 b # " " " "
" " " b #
- v SCORE
b # - v
FREQ b # "
b
5. Display the stat plot using
the ZoomStat command.
( 7
6. Trace the plot, if desired.
)
! and " (to trace
point to point)
126 Chapter 6: Statistical Plots
Statistical
Analyses
7
The - v MATH Menu................................................128
min( and max( - v " " 1 and 2.....................128
mean(, median(, and mode(
- v " " 3, 4, and 5.....................................130
stdDev( - v " " 6...........................................131
sum( - v " " 7................................................132
The - v CALCULATE Menu.......................................133
Using Frequency Lists with
- v CALC Menu Items.................................133
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats
- v " " " 1 and 2 .....................................134
Manual-Fit - v ! 3 ..........................................138
Med-Med - v ! 4............................................140
LinReg(ax+b) - v ! 5 ......................................142
QuadReg - v ! 6.............................................144
ExpReg - v ! 7................................................146
128 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
The - v MATH Menu
The - v MATH menu allows you to calculate statistical
analyses with lists (see chapter 5: Lists).
- v " "
1:min(
Returns the minimum of two real numbers,
lists, or expressions.
2:max(
3:mean(
Returns the maximum of two real numbers,
lists, or expressions.
Returns the calculated average of the values
in a list.
4:median(
5:mode(
Returns the middle value occurring in a list.
Returns the most frequently occurring
element in a list.
6:stdDev(
7:sum(
Returns the standard deviation of the
elements in a list.
Returns the sum of the elements in a list.
min( and max( - v " " 1 and 2
These are identical to the min( and max( commands found on
the 1 NUM menu.
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or the
smallest element in one list. value can be a real number,
expression or a list.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 129
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same number
of elements. If one argument is a list and the other a non-list,
the non-list is compared with each element of the list, and a
list is returned.
min(valueA,valueB)
min(list)
max( (maximum) functions exactly like min(, but it always
returns the larger of two values or the largest element in a list.
Simply substitute max( in place of min( in the syntax models
above.
Compare L1 and L2 to find the min( and max(. L1={1,2,3}, and
³
L2={3,2,1}.
1. Define two lists in the List
editor, L1 and L2.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Find the list minimums.
-l:
-v""1
- v 1 ¡
- v 2 E b
3. Find the list maximums.
-v""2
- v 1 ¡
- v 2 E b
130 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
mean(, median(, and mode(
- v " " 3, 4, and 5
median( returns the median (the middle element) of list when
the elements, even if the list elements are not arranged in
numerical order. With an even number of elements, the
calculator returns the average of the two middle elements.
mean( returns the mean (mathematical average) of list. mode(
returns the mode (element which occurs most frequently) of
list.
If a second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq must
have the same number of elements. If freq is not included,
then the default is 1 and every element in the first list is only
counted once.
mean(list[,freq])
median(list[,freq])
mode(list[,freq])
Calculate David’s final course average for his math class.
³
He received an 85 on Test 1, a 78 on Test 2, and a 90 on Test 3.
He received an 82 on his Midterm Exam and a 75 on his
Final Exam.
Tests count 1 time, the Midterm counts 2 times, and the Final
Exam counts 3 times.
¨TEST {85,78,90,82,75}
¨FREQ {1,1,1,2,3}
1. Create two lists in the List
editor, TEST and FREQ.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5:Lists.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 131
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the average of
the test scores.
- l :
- v " " 3
- v TEST
b ¡ - v
FREQ b E b
David's final course
average is 80.25.
Solution
stdDev( - v " " 6
stdDev( returns the standard deviation of list. If a second list,
freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the frequency of the
elements in the first list. list and freq must have the same
number of elements.
stdDev(list,freq[,type])
type=0 (population standard deviation) or 1 (sample
population deviation). If type is not specified, the calculator
returns sample population deviation.
Find the population standard
³
deviation of ¨TEST (from the
previous example). Use ¨FREQ as
your freq.
- v " " 6
- v TEST b
¡ - v FREQ
b ¡ 0 E b
132 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
sum( - v " " 7
sum( (summation) returns the sum of all elements in list.
Specify the additional optional arguments to return the sum of
the range of elements between start and end. start and end
represent element places, not the element values.
To add the entire list:
sum(list)
To add the range of elements from start to the last element in
list:
sum(list,start)
To add the range of elements between start and end:
sum(list,start,end)
Find the sum of ¨SUM between elements 4 and 6, where
³
¨SUM={3,10,36,14,33,5,22,45}.
1. Create a list, in the List
editor, SUM.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the partial list
sum.
- l :
- v " " 7
- v SUM b
¡ 4 ¡ 6 E b
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 133
The - v CALC Menu
The - v CALC menu allows you to calculate statistical
analyses on lists. When you choose an item from the menu, the
calculator returns a list of statistical variables. Following the
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats explanation, a list and definition of all
possible statistical variables is provided.
- v " " " –o r –
- v !
1:1-Var Stats
2:2-Var Stats
3:Manual-Fit
Calculates 1-variable statistics.
Calculates 2-variable statistics.
Allows user to fit a line manually to
plotted data.
4:Med-Med
Calculates a Median-Median line for the
plotted data.
5:LinReg(ax+b)
6:QuadReg
7:ExpReg
Fits a linear model to plotted data.
Fits a quadratic model to plotted data.
Fits an exponential model to plotted data.
Using Frequency Lists with - v CALC
Menu Items
For all menu items, you can specify a second list, freq, which
is interpreted as the frequency of the elements in the first list.
Each element in freq must be ‚ 0, and at least one element
must be > 0.
134 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
Non-integer freq elements are valid. This is useful when
entering frequencies expressed as percentages or parts that
add up to 1. However, if freq contains non-integer frequencies,
Sx and Sy (sample standard deviation) are undefined, and
values are not displayed for Sx and Sy in the statistical results.
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats - v ! 1 and 2
1-Var Stats (one-variable statistics) analyzes data from one list
with one measured variable (X). 1-Var Stats accepts two
optional arguments, XList and freq. If XList is not specified,
the default list name is L1.
1-Var Stats [XList,freq]
2-Var Stats (two-variable statistics) analyzes paired data from
two lists with two measured variables, X, the independent
variable, and Y, the dependent variable. 2-Var Stats accepts
three optional arguments, XList, YList, and freq. If XList and
YList are not specified, the default list names are L1 and L2.
2-Var Stats [XList,YList,freq]
Find the 1-Var Stats for L1, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}. Use L2 as
³
freq, where L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}.
1. Define two lists in the List
editor, L1 and L2.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 135
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the 1-Var Stats
for the lists.
- l :
- v ! 1
- v 1 ¡
- v 2 b
Press $ and # to
scroll all results.
Find the 2-Var Stats for L1 (XList) and L2 (YList), where
L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}. Use L3 as freq, where
{L3=1,2,2,2,4,4,3,3}.
³
1. Define the three lists in the
List editor, L1, L2, and L3.
3
For more information on entering lists,
see Chapter 5: Lists.
2. Return to the Home screen,
and calculate the 2-Var Stats
for the lists.
- l :
- v ! 2
- v 1 ¡
- v 2 ¡
- v 3 b
Press $ and # to
scroll all results.
136 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
What Do the Results Mean?
1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats variables are calculated and stored as
indicated below. To access these variables for use in
expressions, press - } 3:Statistics and select the
appropriate menu. If you edit a list or change the type of
analysis, all statistical variables are cleared.
Variables Definition
VARS Menu
x or y
Mean of all x or y values.
XY
G
Gx or Gy
Gx2 or Gy2
Sum of all x values or y values.
Sum of all x2 values or y2
G
values.
Sx or Sy
sx or sy
n
Sample standard deviation of
XY
x or y.
Population standard deviation XY
of x or y.
Number of x or x,y data points. XY
minX
minY
Minimum of x values or y
values.
XY
XY
G
maxX
maxY
Maximum of x values or y
values.
Gxy
Sum of x¦y for all xy pairs in
two lists.
Q1
Median of the elements
between minX and Med (1st
quartile). Only calculated for
1-Var Stats.
PTS
Med
Q3
Median of all data points.
PTS
PTS
Median of the elements
between Med and maxX (3rd
quartile). Only calculated for
1-Var Stats.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 137
Variables Definition
VARS Menu
r
Correlation coefficient
Coefficient of determination
Regression equation
Summary points
EQ
EQ
EQ
PTS
r2 or R2
RegEQ
x1,y1,x2,y2,
x3,y3
a, b, c
Regressionà fit coefficients
EQ
n (number of data points)
n=number of x data points in a 1-Var Stats analysis or the
number of x and y data points in a 2-Var Stats analysis. Since
both variable lists always have the same number of list
elements in 2-Var Stats, n for x is always equal to n for y.
Therefore, n applies to both the x and y analyses.
freq (Frequency Lists)
If freq is specified, n is equal to the sum of the elements in that
list. For example, if the freq is {2,2,3,1,2}, n={2+2+3+1+2}=10.
Q1, Q3, and Med
Q1, Q3, and Med are undefined if the freq contains non-integer
values. They also are not calculated if the freq contains a value
larger than 99.
RegEQ
The calculator stores the most recently generated regression
equation (see - v CALC menu items 3–7) to the variable,
RegEQ. If, for example, you execute 5: LinReg(ax+b), but you
don’t initially store RegEQ to a Yn variable, you can later insert
RegEQ into the Y= editor. The calculator graphs the regression
equation when it is selected.
If the frequency for an element or data pair is 0, the element or
data pair is ignored in the calculation.
138 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
Manual-Fit - v ! 3
Manual-Fit allows you to fit a line to plotted data on the Graph
screen manually (as opposed to the calculator automatically
drawing it for you). You can execute Manual-Fit from either the
Graph screen or the Home screen.
From the Graph screen, select Manual-Fit, and then draw the
line (steps provided below). The linear equation in the form
y=ax+b is shown at the top of the Graph screen. You can use
the cursors to adjust the line, if necessary, and the a and b
equation values change accordingly.
From the Home screen, Manual-Fit accepts one optional
argument, Yn. The calculator stores to Yn (in the Y= editor)
the ax+b equation that manually fits the plotted data. To access
the Yn variables, press - } 2.
Manual-Fit Yn
From either the Home screen or the Graph screen or Program
editor, select Manual-Fit after you have plotted the stat plot. To
draw the Manual-Fit line:
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the line segment
that you want to draw, and then press b.
2. As you press the cursor keys, the line is drawn and the
slope is adjusted. When you have matched the plotted
points as desired, press b.
3. The line segment is drawn across the entire screen and
the ax+b equation is shown at the top of the Graph screen.
4. Continue to adjust the line’s slope with $ and #, and the
y-intercept with ! and ", if desired.
5. If you specified a Yn variable on the Home screen, you can
view the selected and defined equation in the Y= editor
(&). If you no longer want to view the Manual-Fit line,
deselect it in the Y= editor by highlighting the = and
pressing b.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 139
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use Manual-Fit to draw a line through the
points.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to 2, if desired.
. # " " " b
2. After entering the lists,
define Plot1 as a scatter plot
using L1 and L2, as shown to
the right.
- e b
For more information on defining stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off Y2, Y3, and Y4, if
they have been previously
defined and selected.
- l :
- } 2
6
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 b
4. Plot L1 and L2.
( 7
5. From the Home screen,
assign the Manual-Fit (ax+b)
line to Y1.
- l :
- v ! 3
- } 2 1 b
140 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
6. Move the cursor to the
beginning point of line.
" ! $ # (as
necessary)
b
Cursor changes to a small box.
7. Move the cursor to the end
point of line.
" ! $ # (as
necessary)
8. Draw the line.
ax+b
b
9. Adjust line with cursor
keys, if necessary.
" ! $ #
b (when finished)
10. View the equation in the
Y= editor, if desired.
Y2, Y3, and Y4
may vary.
&
Med-Med - v ! 4
Med-Med (Median-Median) fits the model equation, y=ax+b, to
the data using the median-median line (resistant line)
technique, calculating the summary points x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, and
y3. Med-Med displays values for a (slope) and b (y-intercept).
You can execute Med-Med from either the Graph screen, the
Home screen, or the Program editor.
From the Home screen or the Program editor, Med-Med accepts
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and
YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation variable, Yn. freq
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList and YList.
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 141
If freq is omitted, all values are used once. If XList and YList
are not specified, the default list names are L1 and L2. To
access Yn variables, press - } 2:Y-Vars.
Med-Med [XList,YList,freq,Yn]
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use Med-Med to draw the median-median
line through the points.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to 2, if desired.
. # " " " b
2. After entering the lists,
define Plot1 as a scatter plot
using L1 and L2, as shown to
the right.
- e
For more information on defining stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off Y3 and Y4, if they
have been previously
defined and selected.
- l :
- } 2
6
3 ¡ 4 b
4. Find the Med-Med line, and
store the results to Y2.
: - v ! 4
- } 2 2 b
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since
they are the default listnames.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the Yn variable.
142 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
The Manual-Fit line,
Y1 (previous section).
5. View the line on the Graph
screen.
( 7
The Med-Med
line
6. View the equation stored to
Y2, if desired.
Y3 and Y4
may vary.
&
LinReg(ax+b) - v ! 5
LinReg(ax+b) (linear regression) fits the model equation y=ax+b
to the data using a least-squares fit. It displays the value for a
(slope) and b (y-intercept); when DiagnosticOn is set, it also
displays values for r2 (coefficient of determination) and r
(correlation coefficient). The DiagnosticOn command is in the
CATALOG (-|).You can execute LinReg(ax+b) from the
Graph screen, Home screen, or the Program editor.
It is also helpful to compare the slope of the line you draw
with Manual-Fit to the slope of the line the calculator calculates
with the LinReg(ax+b) command.
From the Home screen or the Program editor, LinReg(ax+b)
accepts four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names,
XList and YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation
variable, Yn. freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once. If XList and YList are not specified,
the default list names are L1 and L2. To access Yn variables,
press - } 2:Y-Vars.
LinReg(ax+b) [XList,YList,freq,Yn]
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 143
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use LinReg(ax+b) to draw the linear
regression line through the points.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to 2, if desired.
. # " " " b
2. After entering the lists,
define Plot1 as a scatter plot
using L1 and L2, as shown to
the right.
- e
For more information on defining stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off Y3 and Y4, if they
have been previously
defined and selected.
- l :
- } 2
6
3 ¡ 4 b
4. Find the LinReg(ax+b) line,
and store the results to Y2.
- l :
- v ! 5
- } 2 2 b
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since
they are the default listnames.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the Yn variable.
144 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
The Manual-Fit line, Y1 (see
5. View the line on the Graph
screen.
example from that section)
( 7
The LinReg(ax+b) line
6. View the equation stored to
Y2, if desired.
Y3 and Y4
&
may vary.
QuadReg - v ! 6
QuadReg (quadratic regression) fits the second-degree
polynomial y=ax2+bx+c to the data. It displays values for a, b,
and c; when DiagnosticOn is set, it also displays a value for r2
(coefficient of determination). The DiagnosticOn command is in
the CATALOG (- |). You can execute the QuadReg
command from the Graph screen, the Home screen, or the
Program editor.
For three data points, the equation is a polynomial fit; for four
or more, it is a polynomial regression. At least three data
points are required.
From the Home screen or the Program editor, QuadReg accepts
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and
YList; a frequency list, freq; and an equation variable, Yn. freq
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted, all values are used
once. If XList and YList are not specified, the default list
names are L1 and L2. To access Yn variables, press - } 2.
QuadReg [XList,YList,freq,Yn]
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 145
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use QuadReg to draw the quadratic
regression curve through the points.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to 2, if desired.
. # " " " b
2. After entering the lists,
define Plot1 as a scatter plot
using L1 and L2, as shown to
the right.
- e
For more information on defining Stat
plots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off Y2, Y3 and Y4, if they
have been previously
defined and selected.
- l :
- } 2
6
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 b
4. Find the QuadReg curve, and
store the results to Y1.
- l :
- v ! 6
- } 2 1 b
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since
they are the default listnames.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the Yn variable.
5. View the curve on the
Graph screen.
( 6
146 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
6. View the equation stored to
Y1, if desired.
Y2, Y3, and Y4
&
may vary.
ExpReg - v ! 7
ExpReg (exponential regression) fits the model equation y=abx
to the data using a least-squares fit and transformed values x
and ln(y). It displays values for a and b; when DiagnosticOn is
set, it also displays values for r2 (coefficient of determination)
and r (correlation coefficient). The DiagnosticOn command is in
the CATALOG (- |). You can execute ExpReg from the
Graph screen, the Home screen, or the Program editor.
From the Home screen or the Program editor, ExpReg accepts
four optional arguments. Enter up to two list names, XList and
YList; a frequency list, freq: and an equation variable, Yn. freq
is the frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList and YList. If freq is omitted, all values are used
once. If XList and YList are not specified, the default list
names are L1 and L2. To access Yn variables, press - } 2.
ExpReg [XList,YList,freq,Yn]
Graph a scatter plot for L1 and L2, where L1={1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} and
L2={1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}, and use ExpReg to draw the exponential
regression curve through the points.
³
1. Set Decimal Notation mode
to 2, if desired.
. # " " " b
Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses 147
2. After entering the lists,
define Plot1 as a scatter plot
using L1 and L2, as shown to
the right.
- e
For more information on defining stat
zplots, see Chapter 6: Statistical Plots.
3. Turn off Y2, Y3, and Y4, if
they have been previously
defined and selected.
- l :
- } 2
6
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 b
4. Find the ExpReg curve, and
store the results to Y1.
- l : -
v ! 7 - } 2
1 b
Specifying ¨1 and ¨2 is optional since
they are the default list names.
However, if you were using other list
names, you would have to enter them
before the Yn variable.
5. View the curve on the
Graph screen.
( 6
6. View the equation stored to
Y1, if desired.
Y2, Y3, and Y4
&
may vary.
148 Chapter 7: Statistical Analyses
Tables
8
What Is a Table? ................................................................150
Steps for Creating a Table.................................................151
Defining and Selecting Functions in the Y= Editor &....152
Setting Up the Table - f ....................................153
Displaying the Table - i.......................................154
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Auto ...............................155
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Ask..................................156
Indpnt=Ask..................................................................157
Editing Y from the Table Screen..............................160
n
Table Setup from the Home Screen .................................161
150 Chapter 8: Tables
What Is a Table?
A table displays coordinate pair (X,Y) solutions for a defined
function. One column displays independent variable values
(X), and all others display corresponding dependent variable
values (Y).
On the TIN73, functions can be displayed in one of three ways,
as shown here with the function, Y1=X2-4X+3.
Independent variable (X)
Y= X2N4X+3
Dependent variable (Y)
The Y= editor (&) shows
an algebraic representation.
The Graph screen (*)
shows a graphic representation.
The Table screen (- i)
shows a numeric representation
in coordinate pairs.
For more information about the Y= editor and function
graphing, see Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
Chapter 8: Tables 151
Steps for Creating a Table
Follow these basic steps when defining a table.
&
Define or edit up to four functions
in the Y= editor.
Highlight =, and
press b.
Select the Yn function(s) that you
want to be included in the table.
Y
1 and Y2 are
selected; Y3 is
deselected.
- f
Set up the table.
- i
Display the table. Numeric
Notation, Decimal Notation, and
Angle mode settings determine the
display of the elements.
152 Chapter 8: Tables
Defining and Selecting Functions
in the Y= Editor &
To create a table of values for a function, you first must define
the function in the Y= editor. Press & to display the Y= editor;
then define up to four functions, Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4, in terms of
the independent variable, X.
For every selected function in the Y= editor, the calculator
automatically creates a column of Yn values. Because the
Y= editor holds up to four functions, the TIN73 can create up
to four Yn columns in a table, one for each function.
When you first enter a function, it is selected automatically. To
select or deselect a function, highlight the = with the cursor,
and then press b.
For more details on entering functions, see Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
Define Y1=X2N4X+3.
³
1. Display the Y= editor.
Your screen may vary.
&
2. Move the cursor to Y1, and
clear if necessary.
# :
3. Enter Y1= X2 N4X+3.
I 6 T 4 I \ 3
When you first enter a
function, it is selected
automatically.
Chapter 8: Tables 153
Setting Up the Table - f
Use the TABLE SETUP screen to specify the initial settings for
your table. To select an Indpnt or Depend setting, highlight the
one you want with the cursor, and then press b.
- f
TblStart
Specifies the first value displayed in the
independent variable (X) column and can be
any real number.
Default=0
@Tbl
Specifies the increment by which the X values
Default=1
increase or decrease.
Indpnt:
Refers to the independent variable (X) column
Default=Auto values. You must select one of two choices:
•
•
Auto — X values are automatically
displayed in the independent variable
column when you view the Table screen.
Ask — No X values are shown when you
view the Table screen. Instead, you enter
the values for the X column.
Depend:
Refers to all dependent variable (Yn) column
Default= Auto values. You must select one of two choices:
•
•
Auto — Yn values of all selected functions
are automatically displayed in their
respective columns when you view the
Table screen.
Ask — No Yn values are shown when you
view the Table screen. Instead you select
which Yn values you want the calculator to
display.
154 Chapter 8: Tables
Displaying the Table - i
Once your functions are defined and selected in the Y= editor
and you have set up your table in the TABLE SETUP screen, if
necessary, you can display the table with - i.
- i
On the Table screen, you can see lower X values by placing the
cursor anywhere in the X column and pressing $, as necessary
(you can’t scroll up from the Yn columns). To see higher X
values, use # from anywhere on the Table screen.
Only two Yn columns appear at a time on the Table screen. Use
" to display a third or fourth Yn column.
When you highlight a table element, the entry line displays the
value in its entirety.
The values displayed in the table are affected by the mode
settings. If the calculator is set to the Sci Numeric Notation
mode, all applicable values in all columns are displayed in
scientific notation. If your calculator is set to Radian Angle
mode and a defined function is a trig function, all the table
values for that function are interpreted as radians, not degrees.
Chapter 8: Tables 155
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Auto
Select these settings on the TABLE SETUP screen when you
want all X and Yn values to appear automatically.
You have two dogs, Rover and Spot. You feed Rover 3 times a
day. You feed Spot 4 times a day. How many times will Spot
and Rover have eaten after 3 and 5 days?
³
X=number of days
Y=total times Rover has eaten
Y =3X
1
X=number of days
Y=total times Spot has eaten
Y =4X
2
Note: This resets table settings and
1. Reset default settings.
all mode settings, and deselects any
- Ÿ 7
2
2
previously defined and selected Yn
functions.
2. Display the Y= editor.
Your Y= editor may
look different.
&
3. Clear Y1, if necessary. Enter
Y1=3X.
: 3 I
4. Clear Y2, if necessary. Enter
Y2=4X.
# : 4 I
5. Display the table (using
default table settings).
When X=3, Y1=9
and Y2=12.
- i
Rover has eaten 9 times.
Spot has eaten 12 times.
After Day 3
After Day 5
Rover has eaten 15 times.
Spot has eaten 20 times.
156 Chapter 8: Tables
How many times will Spot and Rover have eaten after 1, 3, and
4 weeks? (Refer to the previous example, if necessary.)
³
1. Set up the table where
TblStart=0, @Tbl=7,
Indpnt=Auto, and
Depend=Auto.
- f
0 # 7 # b
# b
TblStart=0
2. Display the table.
- i
X values change by
7 since @Tbl=7.
Rover has eaten 21 times.
Spot has eaten 28 times.
After Day 7
(End of Week 1)
After Day 21
(End of Week 3)
Rover has eaten 63 times.
Spot has eaten 84 times.
Rover has eaten 84 times.
Spot has eaten 112 times.
After Day 28
(End of Week 4)
Indpnt=Auto and Depend=Ask
Select these settings on the TABLE SETUP screen when you
want X values to appear automatically, but you want to be able
to reveal Yn values one at a time. It is also helpful in
recognizing patterns between different Yn solutions.
Chapter 8: Tables 157
Display the number of times Rover has eaten after 4 days and
8 days, and display the number of times Spot has eaten after 3
days and 6 days. (Refer to the previous example, if necessary.)
³
1. Setup the table where
TblStart=3, @Tbl=1,
Indpnt=Auto, and Depend=Ask.
- f
3 # 1 # b # "
b
X starts with 3 because
TblStart=3.
2. Display the table.
- i
3. Display how many times
Rover (Y1) has eaten after 4
and 8 days.
# " b
# # # # b
4. Display how many times
Spot (Y2) has eaten after 3
and 6 days.
" $ $ b
$ $ $ b
Spot has eaten 12 times.
Rover has eaten 12 times.
After Day 3
After Day 4
Spot has eaten 24 times.
Rover has eaten 24 times.
After Day 6
After Day 8
Indpnt=Ask
Select these settings on the TABLE SETUP screen when you
want to find specific table values, especially those that are not
in chronological order or which span across a large range of
numbers. TblStart and @Tbl do not apply when Indpnt=Ask.
158 Chapter 8: Tables
How many total times will Spot and Rover have eaten after 16
days, 37 days, 52 days, and 74 days? (Refer to the previous
examples, if necessary.)
³
TblStart and @Tbl
1. Setup the table where
values are ignored.
Indpnt=Ask and Depend=Auto.
- f
# # " b
# b
2. Display the table.
- i
3. Enter X=16.
1 6 b
4. Enter X=37, X=52, and X=74.
3 7 b 5 2
b 7 4 b
Rover has eaten 48 times.
Spot has eaten 64 times.
After Day 16
After Day 37
After Day 52
After Day 74
Rover has eaten 111 times.
Spot has eaten 148 times.
Rover has eaten 156 times.
Spot has eaten 208 times.
Rover has eaten 222 times.
Spot has eaten 296 times.
Chapter 8: Tables 159
Editing X Values from the Table Screen
You can edit X values from the Table screen when Indpnt=Ask.
Change X=37 to X=36. (Refer to the previous example, if
necessary.)
³
1. Display the current table.
- i
2. Highlight X=37.
# or $ (as necessary)
3. Move the cursor to the
entry line.
b
4. Clear the entry line.
:
5. Enter 36 and insert it into
table.
3 6 b
Table values
are adjusted.
160 Chapter 8: Tables
Editing Yn from the Table Screen
At any time you can edit Yn from the Table screen without
returning to the Y= editor.
Change Y1 =3x to Y1 =3x+5. (Refer to the previous example, if
necessary.)
³
1. Display the Table screen,
and highlight Y1 with the
cursor.
- i
" a nd $ (as
necessary)
2. Move the cursor to the
entry line.
b
3. Clear the entry line.
:
4. Enter 3X+5.
3 I \ 5
5. Insert the equation back
into the table.
Table values
b
are adjusted.
6. If desired, display the
Y= editor to confirm that Y1
has indeed been changed.
&
Chapter 8: Tables 161
Table Setup from the Home Screen
You can store values to TblStart and @Tbl from the Home screen
or the Program editor. These table variable names are on the
- } 5:Table menu.
You also can select DependAsk, DependAuto, IndpntAsk, and
IndpntAuto from a Program editor to turn on these settings
during program execution.
Assign 6 to TblStart and 3 to @Tbl from the Home screen.
³
1. Go to Home screen and
clear, if desired.
- l :
2. Store 6 to TblStart.
6 X - } 5
1 b
3. Assign 3 to @Tbl.
3 X - } 5
2 b
4. Display the TABLE SETUP
screen to confirm that the
values you entered have
indeed been set.
- f
162 Chapter 8: Tables
Function Graphing
9
Steps for Graphing a Function..........................................164
Example of Function Graphing.........................................165
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor & .........................167
Entering Functions......................................................167
Editing Functions ........................................................168
Selecting Functions .....................................................168
Exiting the Y= Editor ..................................................169
Selecting a Graph Style .....................................................169
Setting the Window Format - g........................171
Defining Window Values..................................................173
The Window Values Screen '.........................174
Determining Window Values for a Specific Graph...175
Displaying a Graph............................................................177
Smart Graph ................................................................178
Exploring the Graph with the Free-Moving Cursor.....178
Exploring a Function Graph with )....................178
Controlling the Increments of a Trace.......................179
Adjusting Window Values with the ( ZOOM Menu...181
Zoom Box (1.......................................................182
Zoom In and Zoom Out ( 2 and 3.....................183
ZStandard ( 6 .....................................................184
ZInteger ( 0 ........................................................184
Other Zoom Commands .............................................185
The ( MEMORY Menu................................................185
ZPrevious ( " 1..................................................185
SetFactors ( " 2.................................................186
164 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Steps for Graphing a Function
Follow these basic steps when graphing a function. You may
not have to do all of them each time.
&
Define or edit up to four functions
in the Y= editor.
Highlight =, and then
press b to select
or deselect.
Select the Yn function(s) that you
want to graph. Deselect statistical
plots, if desired (Chapter 7).
Y
Y
1 is selected;
3 is deselected.
Highlight the area to
the left of Yn. b
cycles through 7
styles.
Set the graph style for each
selected function.
The Above graph
style is selected
for Y1
- g
Set the window format.
( 6 values
Xmin=M10
'
or
(
Define the viewing Window
values. This may include using the
ZOOM menu.
Xmax=10
@x=.21276595744681
Xscl=1
Ymin=M10
Ymax=10
Yscl=1
*,
),
or
Graph the selected functions with
*. ) and ( also
automatically display the graph.
(
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 165
Example of Function Graphing
For every cookie Tham eats, Antonio eats two. How many
cookies does Antonio eat if Tham eats 1 cookie, 2 cookies, 3
cookies, and 4 cookies?
³
Find the equation that represents the relationship between
how many cookies Tham eats and how many Antonio eats,
and represent your answers in the form of a function graph.
X=number of cookies Tham eats
Y=2X
Y=number of cookies Antonio eats
These steps explain what the calculator does internally when
you define a function graph. The next page shows how to use
the TIN73 to find the answers to this example.
1. This example uses these 2. The TIN73 solves for Y
X values:
using specific X values.
Y = 2¦X
Y = 2¦1 = 2
Y = 2¦2 = 4
Y = 2¦3 = 6
Y = 2¦4 = 8
X=1
X=2
X=3
X=4
3. It generates a table of
(X, Y) coordinate pairs
for you to look at.
4. It graphs the (X,Y) pairs.
8
6
4
2
X
1
2
3
4
Y
2
4
6
8
6
5
0
1
3
4
2
166 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Graph Y=2X on your calculator and find the solutions to the
word problem.
³
1. Display the Y= editor.
Your Y= editor may vary.
&
2. Clear Y1=, if necessary.
Deselect all other
defined functions, if
necessary.
Enter Y1=2X.
: 2 I
3. Show the table of (X,Y)
coordinate pairs, if desired;
use TblStart=0 and @Tbl=1.
- i
Use $ and # to scroll
See Chapter 8: Tables for more
information about function tables.
the X column.
4. Define the viewing window
for Quadrant 1 only.
( 4
5. Trace the graph with the
cursor keys.
The trace cursor
X- and Y-
coordinates of
cursor
)
(Use ! and " to move the
cursor along the graph.)
6. Find the Y values when
X=1, 2, 3,and 4.
1 b
2 b
3 b
4 b
When X=1, Y=2.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 167
Defining Functions in the Y= Editor &
Use the Y= editor to define up to four functions, Y1, Y2, Y3, and
Y4, in terms of the independent variable, X.
Press & to display the Y= editor. The TIN73 graphs up to four
defined functions at the same time.
If the result of an expression is not a real number, that point is
not plotted. You do not get an error.
&
Entering Functions
Functions can consist of variables, lists, trigonometric or
logarithmic expressions, or variations of already defined
functions (for example, Y2=2¦Y1). Access a Yn variable by
pressing - } 2:Y-Vars.
Define Y2=3X+5.
³
1. Display the Y= editor.
&
If you tried the chapter
example problem, then Y1=2X.
2. Move the cursor to the
function that you want to
define, Y2.
#
3. Clear Y2, if necessary.
:
4. Enter Y2=3X+5.
3 I \ 5
168 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Editing Functions
You can edit or delete functions at any time in the Y= editor.
Move the cursor to the function in the Y= editor that you want
to change.
You can:
•
Use the edit keys such as / and - m to delete and
insert characters.
•
•
Overwrite current entries.
Delete a function with :. Position the cursor
anywhere on the function.
Selecting Functions
Even if a function is defined in the Y= editor, the TIN73 only
graphs the function if it is selected (turned on). You know that
a function is selected because the background behind a
function’s equal sign (=) is dark.
When you first define a function, it is selected automatically.
To select or deselect a function,
highlight its = using the cursor
keys, and then press b.
Y2 is selected.
Y2 is deselected.
You can change the on/off status of a statistical plot in the
Y= editor. To select or deselect Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3, highlight
the name (across the top of the Y= editor) using the cursor
keys, and then press b. A plot is selected (on) if the
background behind its name is dark.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 169
See Chapter 6: Statistical Plots for more information on
defining and graphing stat plots.
Plot1 is selected. Plot2
and Plot3 are deselected.
Exiting the Y= Editor
To select another screen, press the appropriate key, such as
* or '. Press - l to return to the Home
screen.
Selecting a Graph Style
For a defined function, you can set one of seven styles that
specify the appearance of a function graph. The graph style
icons described below are located to the left of Yn in the
Y= editor. If you do not select a style, the calculator graphs all
defined functions with the default style, Line.
To select a style, press ! from the Yn equal sign (=) to
highlight the graph style icon, and then press b, as
necessary, to cycle through the seven styles. Press " " to
return to the Yn entry line.
The graph style icon.
Graph styles are especially useful when graphing multiple
functions. For example, you can set Y1 as a solid line, Y2 as a
dotted line, and Y3 as a thick line.
170 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Icon Style
Description
Example (Y1=2x)
ç
Line
Connects plotted points
with a line. This is the
default.
è
é
ê
ë
ì
Thick
Above
Below
Path
Connects plotted points
with a thick line.
Shades the area above
the graph.
Shades the area below
the graph.
A circular cursor traces
the graph and draws the
path.
Animate A circular cursor traces
the graph without
drawing the path.
í
Dot
Displays a dot at each
plotted point.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 171
Set the Below graph style for Y2=3X+5.
³
1. Enter the Y= editor and
define Y2=3X+5.
& # : 3 I \ 5
2. Highlight the graph style
icon (to the left of the Y2)
and select the graph style,
Below.
! ! ! ! ! !
b b b
3. Display the graph.
( 6
Setting the Window Format
- g
The window format screen lets you choose display settings.
These apply to function graphing and statistical plotting.
- g
172 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Setting
Turns these on or off:
Example:
CoordOn/
CoordOff
X- and Y-coordinates of
the cursor at the bottom
of the screen. Useful
when tracing a graph.
CoordOn
GridOff/
GridOn
Grid lines that
correspond to the axes
tick marks.
GridOn
AxesOn/
AxesOff
X- and Y-axes.
AxesOff
LabelOff/
LabelOn
Labels for the X- and Y-
axes. These settings are
disregarded when
AxesOff is selected.
LabelOn is especially
helpful when displaying
Quadrant I (( 4)
graphs.
A Quadrant I graph with
LabelOn selected
ExprOn
ExprOn/
ExprOff
Expression which is
currently being traced.
The expression is shown
in the top left corner of a
graph.
When CoordOn and
ExprOff are both selected,
the number in the top-
right corner specifies
which function is being
traced.
Y1 is being traced.
ExprOff
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 173
Defining Window Values
If you enter a function in the Y= editor and press *, but
nothing happens or the graph doesn’t look the way you expect
it to, you may need to adjust the WINDOW values (').
Depending upon which section of a graph you specify through
the WINDOW values, the display on your calculator screen can
look very different.
In the example below, the first calculator screen uses WINDOW
values which include all four quadrants for the function,
Y1=X¦cos(X). (Calculator is in Degree mode.) Then, Quadrants I,
II, III, and IV are shown separately, so you can see how
WINDOW values affect the display. The next section explains
how to redefine the values.
Y1=X¦cos(X)
All Quadrants
Xmin=M500
Xmax=500
Xscl=90
Ymax=500
Xmin=M500
Xmax=500
Ymin=M500
Ymax=500
Yscl=75
Ymin=M500
Quadrant I
Quadrant II
Xmin=M500
Xmax=0
Xmin=0
Xmax=500
Xscl=90
Ymin=0
Xscl=90
Ymin=0
Ymax=500
Yscl=75
Ymax=500
Yscl=75
Quadrant III
Xmin=M500
Xmax=0
Quadrant IV
Xmin=0
Xmax=500
Xscl=90
Xscl=90
Ymin=M500
Ymax=0
Ymin=M500
Ymax=0
Yscl=75
Yscl=75
174 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
The Window Values Screen '
WINDOW values put specific boundaries on the display. For an
explanation of @X, see the section in this chapter entitled
“Controlling the Increments of a Trace.”
To exit the WINDOW menu, select another screen by pressing
the appropriate key, or press - l to return to the Home
screen.
'
Xmin
The minimum value on the X-axis; must be less
than Xmax.
Xmax
The maximum value on the X-axis.
@x
When tracing the graph with ), this
determines the increments between X values.
Xscl
The distance between tick marks on the X-axis.
To turn off the tick marks, set Xscl=0.
Ymin
The minimum value on the Y-axis; must be less
than Ymax.
Ymax
Yscl
The maximum value on the Y-axis.
The distance between tick marks on the Y-axis.
To turn off the tick marks, set Yscl=0.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 175
Determining Window Values for a Specific Graph
The following example shows how you can adjust the WINDOW
values manually (as opposed to using the standard WINDOW
values set by ( 6:ZStandard).
Yuko practices the piano 50 minutes per day. How many
minutes has he practiced after 2, 4, and 5 days? Graph your
answer.
³
X=number of days
Y=number of total minutes
Y=50X
1. A table of coordinate
pairs would look like
this:
X
2
4
5
Y
100
200
250
2. A possible graph of the ordered pairs would look like this
(the WINDOW values are labeled):
Ymax=300
300
250
200
150
100
50
The Y-axis is
measured in
increments of 50;
therefore, Yscl=50.
Xmax=6
0
1
3
4
5
6
2
Xmin=0
Ymin=0
The X-axis is measured in increments
of 1; therefore, Xscl=1.
176 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Graph the function, Y1=50X, on your calculator.
³
1. Display the Y= editor.
&
2. Enter Y1=50X.
: 5 0 I
Note: Deselect any other functions by
Y2 is now deselected.
highlighting the corresponding = and
pressing b.
3. Graph the function using
standard window values
(ZStandard).
Standard values
do not work well
for all functions.
( 6
4. Adjust the WINDOW values
to match the sample graph
from the previous page.
@x adjusts
automatically.
'
0 # 6 # # 1 # 0 #
3 0 0 # 5 0
The graph now
resembles the
graph on the
5. Graph Y1.
*
previous page.
6. Trace the graph.
The trace
cursor.
)
(Use ! and " to move the
cursor along the graph.)
X- and Y- coordinates
of cursor.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 177
7. Find the Y values when
X= 2, 4, and 5.
2 b 4 b 5 b
Note: Consider using the
CONVERSIONS menu (- ‚ 4)
to convert your answers (in minutes) to
seconds, hours, days, weeks, or years.
When X=4, Y=200.
If you trace ()) the graph with the cursor keys to an X
value greater than Xmax or less than Xmin, the cursor goes off
the Graph screen, but the corresponding Y values are still
displayed since they exist. However, you cannot enter X values
(as you did in step 7 above) that are greater than Xmax or less
than Xmin.
Displaying a Graph *
Press * to display the graph of the selected function(s).
(Some operations, such as ) and (, display the graph
automatically.) As a graph is plotted, the busy indicator comes
on (upper right corner) until the graph is completely drawn
and X and Y are updated.
Pressing *, ), or
selecting a ( function graphs
all defined and selected
functions.
•
If the desired WINDOW
values are already set, press
* or ).
Standard default
window values
are set.
•
Press ( to change the
WINDOW values and graph
all selected functions.
( 6:ZStandard
is selected.
( , then select a
function from the menu
178 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
To pause while a graph is being drawn, press b; press
b again to resume plotting.
Press ^ to stop graphing. Press * to start over and plot
again.
Smart Graph
When you press *, the Graph screen immediately displays
(instead of replotting) the previous function graph(s) if no
changes were made. If changes were made, the functions are
replotted.
The graph is replotted if you have:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changed a function.
Selected or deselected a function.
Changed the value of a variable in a selected function.
Changed a WINDOW variable or a - g setting.
Cleared drawings by selecting ClrDraw (Chapter 10: Draw).
Changed a stat plot definition (Chapter 6: Statistical
Plots).
Exploring the Graph with the Free-Moving Cursor
Use ", !, $, and # to move the cursor around the Graph
screen. When you first display the graph, the cursor is in the
middle of the screen but is not visible. When you press a
cursor key, the cursor moves from that point and can be seen.
(Remember to use the - g CoordOn setting if you want
to see the (X,Y) coordinates at the bottom of the screen.)
Exploring a Function Graph with )
Pressing ) allows you to move the ! and " cursor keys
from one plotted point to another and displays the cursor
coordinates at the bottom of the screen (if CoordOn is set). If
ExprOn (- g) is set, the expression being traced
appears in the top left corner.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 179
When more than one function (or stat plot) is selected and
graphed, press $ and # to move the cursor from one function
graph to another.
The cursor movement is based on the order of the functions as
they appear in the Y= editor and not on the appearance of the
functions as graphed on the screen. (However, the TIN73 starts
with selected statistical plots first.)
The function number in the upper right corner of the display
changes as you move to the various graphs.
To quit ) mode, select another screen by pressing the
appropriate key, such as ' or (, or press - l
to return to the Home screen. Press : to stay on the
Graph screen.
Using QuickZoom
While tracing, you can press b to adjust the viewing
window. The cursor location then becomes the center of the
new viewing window, and the cursor remains in ) mode.
This is called QuickZoom. If you do a QuickZoom accidentally,
and you want to return to the zoom settings in the previous
window, select ( MEMORY 1:ZPrevious.
Controlling the Increments of a Trace
By assigning a specific value to @X (which is optional), you can
control the X coordinates of a trace. @X is a WINDOW value;
change it by pressing '.
The TIN73 automatically calculates @X as:
(Xmax-Xmin)
@X =
94
If standard window values are set (ZStandard),
@X = .21276595744681. If you assign a value to @X, the values for
Xmin and Xmax are adjusted automatically according to the
formula above.
180 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
Graph Y1=2X with ZStandard.
³
1. Define Y1=2X in the
Y= editor.
& : 2 I
Note: Deselect any other functions by
highlighting the corresponding = and
pressing b.
2. Graph and trace the
function.
( 6
) " ! (as
necessary)
The TIN73 chooses the
X-value increments.
Assign .5 to @X, and graph and
³
trace Y1=2X.
' # # . 5
)
! and "
X- coordinates
change in
increments of .5.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 181
Adjusting Window Values with the
( ZOOM Menu
The ( ZOOM menu items allow you to adjust the viewing
WINDOW of a graph quickly in a variety of ways. From the
Graph screen, press ' to see the adjusted WINDOW
values.
1:ZBox, 2:Zoom In, and 3:Zoom Out, require you to move the
cursor first to define the viewing window.
(
1:ZBox
Lets you draw a box around a specific
section of the Graph screen. The calculator
then zooms in on the area inside the box.
2:Zoom In
Lets you select a point with the cursor keys.
The calculator then zooms in around the
point by an amount defined by SetFactors
(found on the ( MEMORY menu).
3:Zoom Out
Lets you select a point with the cursor keys.
The calculator then zooms out around the
point by an amount defined by SetFactors.
4:ZQuadrant1
5:ZSquare
Displays Quadrant I only. Replots the graph
immediately.
Adjusts WINDOW variables so that a square
or a circle is shown in correct proportion
(instead of a rectangle or an ellipse).
Replots the graph immediately.
182 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
6:ZStandard
7:ZoomStat
8:ZDecimal
Sets the standard (default) WINDOW
variables. Replots the graph immediately.
Sets the WINDOW values for the current stat
lists. Replots the graph immediately.
Sets @X and @Y to 0.1 and centers the origin.
Replots the graph immediately; press )
to view the new coordinate values.
9:ZoomFit
Adjusts Ymin and Ymax so that the Graph
screen displays the full range of Y variable
values. Replots the graph immediately.
10:ZInteger
Lets you select a new center point, and then
sets @X and @Y to 1 and sets Xscl and Yscl to
10. Replots the graph immediately; press
) to view the new coordinate values.
11:ZTrig
Sets WINDOW variables to preset values that
are often appropriate for graphing trig
functions. Replots the graph immediately.
ZBox ( 1
With ZBox, use the cursor keys to draw a box around a specific
section of the Graph screen that you would like to view up
close. The calculator then zooms in on the area inside the box
with the cursor in the center of the screen.
Explore the function graph,
Y1=2X with ZBox.
³
1. Display the graph of a
selected function (the
example shows Y1=2X).
( 6
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 183
2. Select the ZBox function and
return to the function
graph.
( 1
Cursor changes
3. Move the cursor to one
corner of the box you want
to define.
to a small square.
" ! $ # b
4. Move the cursor to the
corner diagonally opposite
from the first one.
" ! $ #
5. Replot the graph.
The cursor is in the
center of the new screen.
b
Zoom In and Zoom Out ( 2 and 3
Zoom In magnifies the graph around the cursor location.
Zoom Out displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on
the cursor location, to provide a more global view. (The
procedure is the same for both.)
After a Zoom In or Zoom Out operation is selected, move the
cursor, as necessary, and press b to select the new center
point. Repeat the operation until another operation is selected
or you exit the Graph screen.
1. Display the graph of a
selected function (the
example shows Y1=X2).
³
( 6
184 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
You want to
zoom in on
this side of the
graph.
2. Select the Zoom In operation
for the function graph.
( 2
3. Move the cursor to the
point that you want as the
center of the new viewing
window.
" ! $ #
4. Replot the graph.
The cursor point
b
becomes the center
of the new window.
Zoom Out works exactly the same way as Zoom In. The
calculator zooms out automatically around the center point.
ZStandard ( 6
ZStandard is one of the more popular zoom commands because
many function graphs look good when graphed according to
the standard (default) WINDOW values: Xmin=M10, Xmax=10,
Xscl=1, Ymin=-M10, Ymax=10, Yscl=1.
If you select the ZStandard operation, either from the Graph
screen or another screen, all selected functions are
immediately replotted according to these standard WINDOW
values.
ZInteger ( 0
ZInteger requires you first to select a new center point. The
calculator then replots the graph immediately using the
adjusted WINDOW values which set @X and @Y to 1, and Xscl and
Yscl to 10.
Select the center point (as you would do for ZoomIn and
ZoomOut) by moving the cursor with the cursor keys, and then
pressing b. Press ) to view the new coordinate
values.
Chapter 9: Function Graphing 185
Other Zoom Operations
All other Zoom commands, ZQuadrant, ZSquare, ZoomStat,
ZDecimal, ZoomFit, and ZTrig, replot immediately all selected
functions and adjust WINDOW values according to their
definitions. For ZDecimal, press ) to view the new
coordinate values.
Examples of these operations are included in Appendix A:
Function and Instruction Reference.
The ( MEMORY Menu
( "
1:ZPrevious
2:SetFactors
Replots all selected function graphs using
the WINDOW variables of the graph that was
displayed before you executed the last ZOOM
operation.
Define the magnification or reduction factor
used to Zoom In or Zoom Out around a cursor
point. There are two: XFact and YFact.
ZPrevious ( " 1
Selecting ZPrevious automatically replots all selected functions
and stat plots and adjusts WINDOW values according to the
definition of the previous graph.
186 Chapter 9: Function Graphing
SetFactors ( " 2
The zoom factors, XFact and YFact, are positive real numbers
‚1. They define the magnification or reduction factor used to
Zoom In or Zoom Out around a cursor point. The default values
for both XFact and YFact are 4. Highlight the factor you want to
change, press :, and then enter the new value. XFact and
YFact do not affect any other Zoom operations.
Drawing
10
The 2 DRAW Menu.....................................................188
ClrDraw 2 1.........................................................189
Line( 2 2 ..............................................................189
Horizontal and Vertical 2 3 and 4 .....................191
Shade( 2 5...........................................................193
Circle( 2 6............................................................195
Text( 2 7..............................................................197
Pen 2 8 ................................................................199
The 2 POINTS Menu....................................................201
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(
2 " 1, 2, and 3...............................................202
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(
2 " 4, 5, and 6...............................................205
pxl-Test( 2 " 7....................................................206
The 2 STO Menu .........................................................206
StorePic 2 " " 1................................................207
RecallPic 2 " " 2...............................................208
Deleting a Graph Picture............................................208
188 Chapter 10: Drawing
The 2 DRAW Menu
The 2 DRAW menu items let you draw on top of function
graphs and stat plots (see Chapter 9: Function Graphing and
Chapter 6: Statistical Plots). The way the TIN73 interprets
draw instructions depends on whether you accessed the menu
items from the Home screen or the Program editor, or directly
from a graph.
Note: Redefining WINDOW values, graphing a Yn function or
stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items from the
Graph screen.
2
1:ClrDraw
2:Line(
Clears all drawn elements.
Draws a line segment between two points.
Draws a horizontal line.
3:Horizontal
4:Vertical
5:Shade(
6:Circle(
7:Text(
Draws a vertical line.
Shades an area between two functions.
Draws a circle.
Draws text on a Graph screen.
Activates the free-form drawing tool.
8:Pen
When using a 2 DRAW menu item or 2 POINTS menu
item to draw directly on a graph, the cursor coordinates are
displayed if CoordOn is selected (- g). If a graph is not
displayed when you select a 2 DRAW menu item, the Home
screen is displayed.
Chapter 10: Drawing 189
ClrDraw 2 1
ClrDraw clears all drawn elements from the Graph screen. All
points, lines, and shading drawn with 2 DRAW menu items
are temporary. Therefore, if you leave the Graph screen, and
then return, all drawings are erased.
If you select ClrDraw from the Graph screen, the current graph
is replotted and displayed with no drawn elements. You can
save drawings and recall them with the 2 STO menu.
If you select ClrDraw from the Home screen or a program, it is
pasted to the cursor location. Pressing b executes the
instruction, all drawings on the current graph are erased, and
the message Done is displayed. When you display the graph
again, all drawn elements disappear.
Line( 2 2
Line( draws a line from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ). You can execute
the Line( instruction from the Graph screen, the Home screen
or Program editor.
Line( from the Graph Screen
To draw a line on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 2. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen. If
they are not, you can turn them on by selecting CoordOn
(- g).
2. Position the cursor at the beginning point of the line
segment that you want to draw, and then press b.
The cursor becomes a small box.
3. Move the cursor to the end point of the line segment, and
then press b. The line segment is drawn as you move
the cursor.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Line(, press
:.
190 Chapter 10: Drawing
Draw a line segment from the Graph screen.
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the beginning
point of the line segment.
The cursor
becomes
a small box.
( 6 2 1 2 2
# $ " !
(as necessary)
b
2. Select the ending point of
the line segment.
The line segment
is finished.
# $ " !
(as necessary)
b
Line( from the Home Screen or Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, Line( can draw
or erase a line segment from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ) on the
Graph screen.
You follow the Line( instruction with the coordinates of the
beginning point (X1,Y1) and the ending point (X2,Y2) of the line
segment. Including the argument, 0, after the X and Y
coordinates erases a line from (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).
To draw the line segment:
Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2)
To erase a line segment:
Line(X1,Y1,X2,Y2,0)
Chapter 10: Drawing 191
From the Home screen, draw a line segment from (0,0) to
(6,9).
³
1. From the Home screen,
clear the Graph screen.
- l :
2 1 b
2. Specify the (X,Y)
coordinates and draw the
line segment.
' is set to
standard default
2 2
values.
0 ¡ 0 ¡ 6 ¡ 9 E b
Erase the portion of the line from (2,3) to (4,6).
³
- l 2 2
2 ¡ 3 ¡ 4 ¡ 6 ¡ 0 E
b
Horizontal and Vertical 2 3 and 4
Horizontal and Vertical draw a horizontal or vertical line on the
Graph screen. You can execute both instructions from the
Graph screen, Home screen or the Program editor.
192 Chapter 10: Drawing
Horizontal and Vertical from the Graph Screen
To draw a horizontal or vertical line on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 3 or 4. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and
Y-coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. A line is displayed that moves as you move the cursor.
Place the cursor on the Y-coordinate (for horizontal lines)
or the X-coordinate (for vertical lines) through which you
want the line to pass.
3. Press b to draw the line on the graph.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Horizontal or
Vertical, press :.
Draw a horizontal line from the
Graph screen.
' is set to
standard default
values.
³
³
* 2 1 2 3
# $ (as necessary)
b
Draw a vertical line from the
Graph screen.
* 2 4
" ! (as necessary)
b
Horizontal and Vertical from the Home Screen or
Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, Horizontal draws
a horizontal line at Y=y. y can be an integer or an expression.
Horizontal y
Chapter 10: Drawing 193
Vertical draws a vertical line at X=x. x can be an integer or an
expression.
Vertical x
From the Home screen, draw a
horizontal line at Y=4.
³
' is set to
- l :
2 1 b 2 3
standard default
values.
4 b
Draw a vertical line at X=4.
³
- l 2 4
4 b
Shade( 2 5
With Shade(, you can shade areas above and below functions
on the Graph screen.
You can execute Shade( only from the Home screen or in a
programming instruction. Shade( accepts two mandatory
arguments and four optional arguments. However, you cannot
skip any arguments. For example, if you want to specify the
5th argument, pattern, you also must specify the 3rd and 4th
arguments, left and right.
Shade(lower,upper[,left,right,pattern,res])
194 Chapter 10: Drawing
To use Shade( from the Home screen or a program:
1. Select 2 5.
2. Enter two functions, lower and upper, in terms of X. After
the instruction is executed, the calculator graphs the
functions and shades above lower and below upper.
3. Enter left and right, the left and right X boundaries, if
desired. Xmin and Xmax are the defaults.
4. Enter the shading pattern number, pattern, if desired.
The four shading patterns are:
1=Vertical (default)
2=Horizontal
3=Diagonal upper left to lower right
4=Diagonal lower left to upper right
5. Specify the pattern resolution, res, an integer number
between 1 and 8, if desired.
res=1 is the default and represents the lowest resolution
(lines drawn very close together). res=8 represents the
highest resolution (lines drawn very far apart).
6. Press b to execute the instruction.
Shade above the function Y=X-2
(lower) and below the function
³
Y=X3-8X (upper).
Y=X-2
(The functions are shown to the
right as they would look if
graphed individually.)
Y=X3-8X
Chapter 10: Drawing 195
- l :
2 1 b
2 5 I T 2 ¡ I
1 3 T 8 I E b
Enter a left X boundary, M2, and a right X boundary, 5, for the
same functions.
³
- l 2 1 b
- £ - £
! ¡ a 2 ¡ 5 E b
`
5 is the right
boundary.
M2 is the left boundary.
Circle( 2 6
You can execute the Circle( instruction from the Graph screen,
Home screen, or the Program editor.
Circle( from the Graph Screen
To draw a circle on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 6. The cursor appears
in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. Place the cursor at the center point of the circle you want
to draw. Press b.
3. Move the cursor to a point on the circumference. Press
b. The circle is drawn automatically on the graph.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Circle(, press
:.
196 Chapter 10: Drawing
Draw a circle from the Graph screen.
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the center point
of the circle.
* 2 1 2 6
# $ " ! (as
necessary)
b
2. Move the cursor to a point
on the circumference.
$ # " !
(as necessary)
3. Draw the circle.
b
Circle( from the Home Screen or Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw a
circle on the Graph screen. Circle( accepts three mandatory
arguments: X and Y, the coordinates of the center point of the
circle, and radius, the radius length which must be a positive
real number.
Circle(X,Y,radius)
Draw a circle with center point=(0,0) and radius=7.
³
- l : 2
1 b 2 6
0 ¡ 0 ¡ 7 E b
Note: Use ( 5:ZSquare to adjust
them and make the circle circular.
Chapter 10: Drawing 197
Text( 2 7
You can access Text( from the Graph screen, Home screen, or
the Program editor. Text( allows you to draw text on the Graph
screen when a graph is displayed. Use the Text editor
(- t) to access all text characters. You may enter TIN73
functions, variables, and instructions as text. The font is
proportional, so the exact number of characters you can place
on the graph varies.
Text( from the Graph Screen
To draw text on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 7. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen.
2. Place the cursor at the point where you want the text to
begin.
3. Press - t to display the Text editor. Select the text
characters. Highlight Done with the cursor, and then press
b. The selected text is pasted onto the Graph screen.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Text(, press
:.
From the Graph screen, Label Quadrant I with QUAD1.
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the beginning
point where you want the
text to start.
* 2 1 2 7
# $ " !
(as necessary)
2. Using the Text editor, enter
QUAD1.
- t Q b
U b A b
D b 1 Done b
198 Chapter 10: Drawing
Text( from the Home Screen or the Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw
text on the Graph screen.
Text( accepts three mandatory arguments: row and column,
which specify the pixel value of the top-left corner of the first
character, and text, which can be functions, variables, or text
instructions.
Text(row,column,text)
Text(row,column,"text")
row is an integer between 0 and 57 and column is an integer
between 0 and 94. Therefore, (0,0) is the top left corner, (0,94),
is the top right corner, (57,0) is the lower left corner, and
(57,94) is the lower right corner. If you try to draw text on any
edge of the Graph screen, the calculator only displays text that
fits; text does not wrap to the next row.
If text is surrounded by quotation marks (" ") (found in the
Text editor), the calculator interprets any characters,
numbers, or expressions as text. If the quotation marks are
omitted, the TIN73 calculates and displays the result, if
applicable, with up to 10 characters.
Label Quadrant I with QUAD1 from the Home screen. Start the
text at the pixel value of (10,60).
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and select the beginning
point of the text.
- l :
2 1 b
2 7 1 0 ¡ 6 0 ¡
Chapter 10: Drawing 199
2. Using the Text editor, enter
"QUAD1".
- t " b
Q b U b
A b D b 1
" b Done b E
b
Pen 2 8
Pen draws any shape you want, including irregular or unusual
ones.
You can execute Pen only from the Graph screen. You cannot
execute Pen from the Home screen or the Program editor.
To draw your own shape on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 8. The cursor
appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X- and Y-
coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. Place the cursor at the point where you want to begin
drawing. Press b to turn on the pen.
3. Move the cursor. As you move the cursor, you draw on
the graph, shading one pixel at a time.
4. Press b to turn off the pen.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4, as necessary. To cancel Pen,
press :.
200 Chapter 10: Drawing
Draw a happy face on the Graph screen.
³
1. Clear all previous drawings,
and then select AxesOff.
* 2 1
- g # # "
b
2. First draw a circle.
* 2 6 b
$ (as necessary)
b
3. Use Pen( to draw the eyes.
2 8
# and !
(as necessary)
b b
" (as necessary)
b b
4. Draw the mouth.
# b (to begin
smile)
! # (repeat as
necessary)
! (repeat as
necessary)
! $ (repeat as
necessary)
Chapter 10: Drawing 201
The 2 POINTS Menu
The 2 POINTS menu items let you draw or erase individual
points or pixels on top of function graphs and stat plots (see
Chapter 9: Function Graphing and Chapter 6: Statistical Plots).
The way the TIN73 interprets the point instructions depends
on whether you accessed the instructions from the Home
screen or the Program editor, or directly from a graph.
Redefining WINDOW values (( 6:ZStandard), graphing a Yn
function or stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items
from the Graph screen.
Note: All examples in this section show the Graph screen set
to standard WINDOW values and with all Yn functions and stat
plots deselected.
2 "
1:Pt-On(
Turns on a point.
2:Pt-Off(
Turns off a point.
3:Pt-Change(
4:Pxl-On(
Toggles a point on or off.
Turns on a pixel.
5:Pxl-Off(
Turns off a pixel.
6:Pxl-Change(
7:pxl-Test(
Toggles a pixel on or off.
Returns 1 if pixel is on, 0 if pixel is off.
202 Chapter 10: Drawing
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change(
2 " 1, 2, and 3
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( turn on, off, or change the status
of a point from the Graph screen, Home screen, or Program
editor.
A point (as opposed to a pixel) is tied directly to the X- and Y-
axes. The screen is divided into X- and Y-coordinates as
specified by (X,Y). The points that you can view depend upon
how the WINDOW values are defined.
For example, if standard WINDOW values are set, M10X10 and
M10Y10. This does not mean that points outside these
boundaries do not exist, only that you cannot see any turned
on points outside these boundaries.
Pt-On(, Pt-Off( and Pt-Change( from the Graph Screen
To use Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( on the Graph screen:
1. From the Graph screen, select 2 " 1, 2, or 3. The
cursor appears in the middle of the Graph screen. The X-
and Y-coordinates are shown at the bottom of the screen.
2. Move the cursor:
•
•
•
To the position where you want to draw the point
(Pt-On( ).
To the position of the point you want to erase
(Pt-Off( ).
To the position of the point you want to change
(toggle on or off) (Pt-Change( ).
3. Press b to draw, erase, or change the point.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as necessary. To cancel Pt-On(,
Pt-Off(, or Pt-Change(, press :.
Chapter 10: Drawing 203
Draw points from the Graph screen.
³
1. Select AxesOn, if desired,
and then clear all previous
drawings.
- g # # b
* 2 1
2. Select the beginning point
where you want to draw the
point.
2 " 1 " ! $ #
(as necessary)
3. Draw the point.
b
4. Repeat as necessary.
Erase four points from the
Graph screen.
³
1. Move the cursor to the
point you want to erase.
* 2 " 2
" ! $ #
(as necessary) b
2. Repeat as necessary.
204 Chapter 10: Drawing
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( from the Home Screen
and Program Editor
From the Home screen or the Program editor, you can draw,
erase, or change a point’s status on the Graph screen.
Pt-On(, Pt-Off(, and Pt-Change( accept two mandatory arguments:
X and Y, which specify the coordinates of the point that you
want to draw, erase, or change. Pt-On( and Pt-Off( have one
optional argument, mark, which determines the point’s
appearance. Specify 1 (default), 2, or 3, where:
1(default)= ¦ (dot) 2= › (box)
3= + (cross)
If you specify mark to turn on a point with Pt-On(, you must
specify the same mark when you turn off the point with Pt-Off(.
Pt-Change( does not have the mark argument.
Also note that if, for example, you specify the point (20,30) but
your viewing window is set to the standard values, you do not
see the point since the viewing window does not include the
specific part of the graph where (20,30) exists. Press '
to redefine the WINDOW values.
Note: Redefining WINDOW values, graphing a Yn function or
stat plot, or pressing ( erases all drawn items from the
Graph screen.
Pt-On(X,Y[,mark])
Pt-Off(X,Y[,mark])
Pt-Change(X,Y)
Turn on point (M5,3) and assign the box mark to it.
³
- l :
2 1 b 2 "
1 a 5 ¡ 3 ¡ 2 E b
Chapter 10: Drawing 205
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change(
2 " 4, 5, and 6
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change( turn on, off, or change the
status of a pixel only from the Home screen or the Program
editor.
When you select a pixel instruction from the 2 POINTS
menu, the TIN73 returns you to the Home screen or the
Program editor. Since the pixel instructions are not
interactive, they cannot be used from the Graph screen.
A pixel is independent of the X- and Y- axes. It is based instead
on the physical size of the screen. The screen is divided into
pixels specified as (row,column). 0row62 and 0column94.
Pxl-On(, Pxl-Off(, and Pxl-Change( accept two mandatory
arguments: row and column, which specify the pixel that you
want to draw, erase, or change.
Pxl-On(row,column)
Pxl-Off(row,column)
Pxl-Change(row,column)
Turn on the pixel at (45,35).
³
1. From the Home screen,
clear the Graph screen.
- l :
2 1 b
2. Turn on the pixel.
2 " 4
4 5 ¡ 3 5 E b
206 Chapter 10: Drawing
pxl-Test( 2 " 7
You can execute pxl-Test( only from the Home screen or the
Program editor.
pxl-Test( tests a pixel at (row,column) to see if it is turned on or
off. If it is on, pxl-Test( returns 1. If it is off, pxl-Test( returns 0.
0row57 and 0column94.
pxl-Test(row,column)
Test to see if the pixel at (45,35) is turned on or off.
³
- l 2 " 7
4 5 ¡ 3 5 E b
The 2 STO Menu
The 2 STO (store) menu lets you store or recall up to three
pictures in memory. When you select an instruction from the
2 STO menu, the TIN73 returns to the Home screen or the
Program editor. The picture instructions are not interactive,
which means you cannot use them from the Graph screen.
Note: All examples in this section show the Graph screen set
to standard WINDOW values (( 6:ZStandard) and with all Yn
functions and stat plots deselected.
2 " "
1:StorePic
2:RecallPic
Stores the current picture.
Recalls a stored picture.
Chapter 10: Drawing 207
StorePic 2 " " 1
You can execute StorePic only from the Home screen or
Program editor. You can store up to three pictures, each of
which is an image of the current graph display, in picture
variables Pic1, Pic2, or Pic3. Later, you can superimpose the
stored picture onto a displayed graph from the Home screen
or a program.
A picture includes drawn elements, plotted functions, axes,
and tick marks. The picture does not include axes labels,
lower and upper bound indicators, prompts, or cursor
coordinates. Any parts of the display hidden by these items are
stored with the picture.
StorePic accepts one mandatory argument, number, which
specifies the number of the picture variable to which you want
to store the picture. For example, if you enter 3, the TIN73
stores the picture to Pic3. Pressing b displays the current
graph and stores the picture.
StorePic number
To see which graph variables have pictures stored to them, use
the PICTURE secondary menu (- } 4:Picture). Each
variable Pic1, Pic2, and Pic3 is marked as either Defined or
Empty. If selected, the variable is pasted next to StoPic.
Store the drawn picture (to the
right) in picture variable 2.
³
For more information on drawing lines,
see the previous section entitled
“Line(.”
- l :
2 " " 1 2 b
You return to
the Graph
screen.
208 Chapter 10: Drawing
RecallPic 2 " " 2
You can execute RecallPic only from the Home screen or
Program editor. Use RecallPic to recall the graph picture stored
in the picture variables Pic1, Pic2, or Pic3.
RecallPic accepts one mandatory argument, number, which
specifies the number of the picture variable that you want to
recall. For example, if you enter 3, the TIN73 recalls Pic3.
Pressing b displays the current graph and superimposes
Pic3 on it. Since pictures are drawings, you cannot trace a
curve that is part of a picture.
RecallPic number
To see which graph variables have pictures stored to them, use
the PICTURE secondary menu (- } 4:Picture). Each
variable Pic1, Pic2, and Pic3 is marked as either Defined or
Empty. If selected, the variable is pasted next to RecallPic.
³
1. Clear the Graph screen.
- l
2 1 b *
2. Recall picture variable 2. (A
picture was stored to it in
the previous example.)
2 " " 2 2 b
You return to the
Graph screen.
Deleting a Graph Picture
To delete graph pictures from memory, use the MEMORY
DELETE:Pic menu (- Ÿ 4:Delete 7:Pic).
Trigonometry
11
The - u TRIG Menu...................................................210
Trig Functions - u 1, 3, and 5..........................210
Inverse Trig Functions - u 2, 4, and 6 ...............211
Angle Mode Settings ..................................................211
Graphing Trig Functions ...................................................214
The - u ANGLE Menu...............................................215
r
Using ¡ and to Specify Degrees and Radians
- u " 1 and 4...............................................216
Converting between Degrees and Radians...............217
Entering Angles in DMS Notation
- u " 1, 2, and 3..........................................218
8DMS - u " 5 ..................................................220
210 Chapter 11: Trigonometry
The - u TRIG Menu
The - u TRIG (trigonometry) menu accesses the
trigonometric (trig) functions (sin(, cos(, tan() and their inverses
(sin-1(, cos-1(, tan-1().
- u
The sine, cosine, and tangent of an angle (q) are defined by the
lengths of the sides of a right triangle.
opposite
sin q =
cos q =
tan q =
hypotenuse
hypotenuse
opposite
adjacent
q
hypotenuse
adjacent
opposite
adjacent
Trig Functions - u 1, 3, and 5
All trig functions return the sine, cosine, or tangent of a real
number, expression, or a each element in a list. If value is a
list, the calculator calculates the trig function of each element
in the list, and a list is returned.
sin(value)
cos(value)
tan(value)
For tan, value cannot be 90, 270, etc., or M90, M270, etc. In other
words, since tan q=sinàcos by definition, tan q is undefined
when cos q=0.
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 211
Hint: This chapter’s section entitled “Graphing Trig
Functions” contains an example which graphs and traces
Y1=tan(X) to show undefined Y values for the function.
Inverse Trig Functions - u 2, 4, and 6
The inverse trig functions calculate the smallest angle that
gives a particular sine, cosine, or tangent. For example, sin-1(.5)
calculates the angle whose sine is .5.
sin-1(value)
cos-1(value)
tan-1(value)
For cos-1 (also called arccosine) and sin-1 (also called arcsine),
M1value1.
All inverse trig functions return the arcsine, arccosine, or
arctangent of value or of each element in a list. If value is a
list, the calculator calculates the inverse trig function of each
element in the list, and a list is returned.
Angle Mode Settings
In trig calculations, angles are interpreted as degrees ( ¡ ) or
radians ( r ), depending on the Angle mode setting, Degree or
Radian.
Set the Angle mode from the mode screen.
.
Depending on the Angle mode, sin(1) is the sine of either 1¡ or
1r. As you can see in the following illustration, 1¡ is not the
same as 1r. Therefore, sin(1¡) ƒ sin(1r ). For correct results,
enter angle values in the same units (degrees or radians) as the
Angle mode setting.
212 Chapter 11: Trigonometry
r
Radians (
)
Degrees (¡ )
p
90¡
2
1
360
1
2p
1¡=
of a circle
r
1 =
of a circle
180¡
0¡, 360¡
p
0, 2p
r
Note: 1 = 57.29578¡
270¡
3p
2
To perform a trig calculation, select the Angle mode for your
value and then select the function. In Radian Angle mode,
angles are often defined in terms of p.
Calculate sin(30) in both degrees and radians.
³
1. Select the Degree Angle
mode.
. # # b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter sin(30).
- u 1
3 0 E b
4. Change to the Radian Angle
mode, and return to the
Home screen.
. # # " b
- l
5. Recall the previous entry to
recalculate sin(30).
- £ b
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 213
In Degree Angle mode, calculate tan-1(1). Check your answer.
³
1. Select the Degree Angle
mode.
. # # b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter tan-1(1).
- u 6
1 E b
4. Using the result, enter
tan(45).
This confirms the
- u 5
previous result.
4 5 E b
In Radian mode, calculate cos(p/4).
³
1. Select the Radian Angle
mode.
. # # " b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter cos(p/4).
- u 3
- „ F 4 E b
214 Chapter 11: Trigonometry
Graphing Trig Functions
In addition to using the calculator to solve trig functions
numerically, as described so far in this chapter, you can solve
trig functions graphically.
For more information on generating function tables or
graphing functions, see Chapter 8: Tables and Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
In Degree Angle mode, find four Y values where Y1=tan(X) is
undefined. Check your answer by displaying the table for Y1.
³
1. Select Degree Angle mode, if
necessary.
. # # b
2. Deselect all Yn functions.
- } 2 6 b
3. Define Y1=tan(X) in the
Y= editor.
& : - u 5
I E
4. Graph the function using
the ZTrig command.
( $ b
5. Trace the graph and
observe where the Y value
is undefined.
)
" and ! , as necessary
When X=90,
Y is undefined.
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 215
6. Use the table to check your
result. Set TblStart=90,
@Tbl=60, Indpnt=Auto and
Depend=Auto.
- f 9 0 # 6 0
- i
$ or # , as necessary
From these two screens, you
know that tan(X) is undefined at
X=M270, M90, 90, 270, 450.
The - u ANGLE Menu
The ANGLE menu lets you specify the unit (degrees, radians, or
DMS) of an angle, and it lets you convert an angle from one
unit to another.
- u "
1:¡
2:'
Designates an angle as degrees, regardless of the
current Angle mode setting or DMS notation.
'
"
In DMS (degrees¡ minutes seconds ) notation,
specifies the minutes.
'
"
3:"
In DMS (degrees¡ minutes seconds ) notation,
specifies the seconds.
r
4:
Specifies an angle as radians, regardless of the
current Angle mode setting.
'
Converts an angle to DMS (degrees¡ minutes
5:8DMS
"
seconds ) notation.
216 Chapter 11: Trigonometry
r
Using ¡ and to Specify Degrees and Radians
- u " 1 and 4
Normally, angles are interpreted according to the Angle mode
setting. However, you can specify an angle as degrees or
radians regardless of the Angle mode.
Suppose a series of trig calculations uses radians, but a few
use degrees. Rather than change from Radian to Degree Angle
mode and then back again, you can stay in the Radian Angle
mode and specify some angles as degrees.
In Radian Angle mode, calculate sin(p/3). Then, without
changing to the Degree Angle mode, calculate sin(60¡).
³
1. Select Radian Angle mode.
. # # " b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter sin(p/3).
- u 1 - „ F 3
E b
4. Use the ¡ designator to
enter sin(60¡).
- u 1
60 is specified as degrees
6 0 - u " 1
E b
even in Radian angle mode.
r
p/3 =60¡.
r
Likewise, you can use to specify an angle as radians in the
Degree Angle mode.
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 217
Converting between Degrees and Radians
Set the Angle mode to the unit you want to convert to because
results are displayed according to the Angle mode setting.
Then use ¡ or r to designate the unit to convert from.
Convert 50¡ to radians.
³
1. Set Angle mode to Radian.
. # # " b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter the value to convert,
50. Use ¡ to specify it as
degrees.
50¡ converted to
radians.
5 0 - u " 1 b
Convert 50r to degrees.
³
1. Set the Angle mode to
Degree.
. # # b
- l
2. Enter the value to convert,
50. Use r to specify it as
radians.
r
50 converted to
degrees.
5 0 - u " 4 b
218 Chapter 11: Trigonometry
Entering Angles in DMS Notation
- u " 1, 2, and 3
'
"
DMS (degrees¡ minutes seconds ) is often used for angles
involving latitude and longitude. The degrees can be any real
number; minutes and seconds must be ‚ 0. To enter an angle
in DMS notation, use the - u ANGLE menu.
30 - u " 1
10 - u " 2
23 - u " 3
30¡10'23"
If you enter the angle of a trig function, where the angle is in
DMS notation (as shown in the following example), the angle
is interpreted as degrees, even in Radian mode.
'
"
Calculate sin(30¡10 23 ) in Degree and Radian mode.
³
1. Select Degree Angle mode.
. # # b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter sin(30¡10'23").
- u 1
3 0 - u " 1
1 0 - u " 2
2 3 - u " 3 E
b
4. Select Radian Angle mode.
. # # " b
Chapter 11: Trigonometry 219
5. Calculate sin(30¡10'23").
- l
- £ b
DMS notation overrides
Radian mode.
In Radian mode, if you enter an angle only (without a trig
function) in DMS notation (as shown in the following
example), the angle is interpreted as degrees, but converted to
a result in radians.
"
'
Convert 20¡10 14 to radians.
³
1. Select Radian Angle mode.
. # # " b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Enter 20¡10'14".
2 0 - u " 1
1 0 - u " 2
1 4 - u " 3
b
The result is in radians.
220 Chapter 11: Trigonometry
8DMS - u " 5
To convert angles to DMS notation, use 8DMS from the
- u ANGLE menu.
angle8DMS
Entering ¡ overrides Radian mode. For example, if you enter
50¡8DMS in Radian mode, the calculator still interprets 50 as
degrees and displays the DMS equivalent.
In Radian mode, if you enter 508DMS (no ¡), the calculator
interprets 50 as radians, and then displays the DMS equivalent.
For example, 508DMS in Radian mode shows 2804¡47'20.312".
Likewise, in Degree mode, if you enter 508DMS (no ¡), the
calculator interprets 50 as degrees, and then displays the DMS
equivalent. For example, 508DMS in Degree mode shows 50¡0'0".
In Degree Angle mode, convert 50.672¡ to DMS.
³
1. Select Degree Angle mode.
. # # b
2. Return to the Home screen,
and clear it, if desired.
- l :
3. Convert 50.672¡ to DMS.
5 0 . 6 7 2
Entering ¡ after 50.672 is
optional in Degree mode.
- u " 5
b
Programming
12
What Is a Program? ...........................................................223
Steps for Creating a Program ...........................................223
Creating and Naming a New Program.............................224
Create New 8 " " 1..........................................224
The Program Editor.....................................................225
Entering Program Commands...........................................226
The 8 CTL Menu ..........................................................227
If 8 1 ....................................................................229
If-Then 8 1 and 2 ................................................229
If-Then-Else 8 1, 2, and 3....................................230
For( 8 4 ................................................................231
While 8 5.............................................................232
Repeat 8 6...........................................................232
End 8 7 ................................................................233
Pause 8 8 .............................................................233
Lbl and Goto 8 9 and 0.......................................234
IS>( 8 A................................................................235
DS<( 8 B...............................................................235
Menu( 8 C............................................................236
SetMenu( 8 D......................................................237
prgm 8 E..............................................................238
Return 8 F............................................................239
Stop 8 G...............................................................239
DelVar 8 H...........................................................240
GraphStyle( 8 I ....................................................240
222 Chapter 12: Programming
The 8 I/O Menu ........................................................... 241
Input 8 " 1......................................................... 242
Prompt 8 " 2 ..................................................... 244
Disp 8 " 3........................................................... 244
DispGraph 8 " 4 ................................................ 245
DispTable 8 " 5 ................................................. 245
Output( 8 " 6 .................................................... 245
getKey 8 " 7...................................................... 246
ClrScreen and ClrTable 8 " 8 and 9.................. 247
GetCalc( 8 " 0.................................................... 247
Get( and Send( 8 " A and B.............................. 247
Editing Program Commands............................................. 248
Inserting, Deleting, and Editing Command Lines..... 249
Copying and Renaming a Program............................ 249
Calling a Program from Another Program................ 250
Executing a Program......................................................... 251
Breaking Out of a Program........................................ 252
Debugging a Program ...................................................... 252
Chapter 12: Programming 223
What Is a Program?
A program is a series of one or more programming commands
to be executed by the calculator. Each command is an
expression or instruction and begins with a colon (:). The
number and size of programs that the TIN73 can store is
limited only by available memory.
Steps for Creating a Program
Follow these basic steps when creating and executing a
program. You may not have to do all of them each time.
8 " "
b
Create a new program
by naming it.
Enter, delete, and edit
command lines in the
Program editor.
- l exits the
Program editor.
8
prgmname b
b
Execute the Program.
8"
prgmname b
If it is necessary to debug the
program, go back to the Program
editor to edit commands.
224 Chapter 12: Programming
Creating and Naming a New Program
You create a new program by selecting 1:Create New from the
8 NEW menu. You then are prompted to name the new
program.
8 " "
1:Create New
Creates a new program and displays
the PROGRAM Name= screen, prompting
you to name the new program.
Create New 8 " " 1
After you select 1:Create New from the 8 NEW menu, the
TIN73 displays Name= to prompt you to name the new program.
A program name can be one to eight characters long. The first
character must be a letter from A to Z. The second through
eighth characters can be any combination of letters and
numbers.
Access letters from the Text editor (- t). If you type a
name with more than eight characters, the calculator accepts
the first eight characters and disregards the rest.
Create a new program and name it PROGRAM1.
³
1. Display the 8 NEW
menu.
8 " "
2. Select 1:Create New.
b
Chapter 12: Programming 225
3. Enter PROGRAM1 at the
cursor.
Begin entering the
name at the cursor.
- t P b
R b O b
G b R b
A b M b 1
Done b
4. Display the Program editor
with the name of the
program on the top line.
b
The Program Editor
You use the Program editor to enter and edit program
commands. Enter the Program editor in one of two ways:
•
•
Create and name a new program from the 8 NEW
menu with 1:Create New. Once the name is entered, the
calculator automatically enters the Program editor with
the name of the program on the top line.
Select a program to edit from the 8 EDIT menu
(8 "). The calculator automatically enters the
Program editor with the name of the program on the top
line.
Each new command line in the Program editor begins with a
colon (:). Enter programming commands at the cursor. You
can enter more than one command per line. To do this,
separate the two commands with a colon (- |
$ $ $ b). If the command line is longer than the screen
is wide, the command wraps to the next screen line.
To exit the Program editor, press - l. All commands are
automatically saved.
226 Chapter 12: Programming
8 " prgmName
– or –
8 " " 1 - t
prgmName D o n e
b b
Program Name
Entering Program Commands
The calculator contains built-in programming commands on
three menus. You access these menus by pressing 8 from
the Program editor. The first two menus, the 8 CTL menu
and the 8 I/O menu, are discussed extensively in the next
two sections. The third menu, the 8 EXEC menu, lets you
call existing programs as subroutines. It is discussed in the
section entitled, “Executing a Program.”
Entering Functions, Instructions, and Variables
In the Program editor, you also can select from function
menus on the calculator (1, - ‚, etc.), change
settings (., - f, etc.), as well as select function
keys (=, 6, etc.). Simply press the appropriate key, and the
function, instruction, or mode setting is pasted at the cursor
location in the Program editor. Also, remember that all
instructions and functions are listed in the CATALOG
(- |).
Programs can access variables and lists saved in memory. If a
program stores a new value to a variable or list, the program
changes the value in memory during execution.
The following menus or keystroke sequences change
appearance or operate differently when accessed from the
Program editor:
•
•
•
•
8 (accesses programming command menus)
- e (changes appearance)
- † (changes appearance)
- f (changes appearance)
Chapter 12: Programming 227
•
•
•
2 DRAW (excludes 8:Pen)
1 MATH (excludes 6:Solver)
( MEMORY (excludes 2:SetFactors)
Exiting the Program Editor
Pressing &, ', *, - Ÿ, - l, or 3 exits
the Program editor and displays the applicable screen. The
calculator automatically saves all command lines in memory
whenever you exit the Program editor.
The 8 CTL Menu
You can only access the 8 CTL (control) menu by pressing
8 from the Program editor. These programming
commands help control the flow of an executing program.
They make it easy to repeat or skip a group of commands
(block) during program execution.
If, For(, While, Repeat, IS>(, and DS<( check a defined condition to
determine which command to execute next. Conditions
frequently use relational or Boolean tests (Chapter 2: Math
Operations). When you select an item from the menu, the
name is pasted to the cursor location on a command line in the
program. To return to the Program editor without selecting an
item, press :.
8 (from the Program
editor only)
228 Chapter 12: Programming
1:If
Creates a conditional test.
2:Then
Executes commands when If condition is
true.
3:Else
Executes commands when If condition is
false.
4:For(
Creates an incrementing loop.
Creates a conditional loop.
5:While
6:Repeat
7:End
Creates a conditional loop.
Signifies the end of a block.
Pauses program execution.
Defines a label.
8:Pause
9:Lbl
0:Goto
Goes to a label.
A:IS>(
Increments and skips if greater than.
Decrements and skips if less than.
Defines menu items and branches.
Views and modifies variables on a menu.
Executes a program as a subroutine.
Returns from a subroutine.
Stops execution.
B:DS<(
C:Menu(
D:SetMenu(
E:prgm
F:Return
G:Stop
H:DelVar
I:GraphStyle(
Deletes a variable from within program.
Designates the graph style to be drawn.
Chapter 12: Programming 229
If 8 1
Use If to execute one command depending upon condition. If
condition is true (non-zero), then command1 is executed. If
condition is false (zero), then command1 is skipped. If
instructions can be nested.
:If condition
:command1 (if true)
:command2
Write a program named COUNT that adds one to variable A and
displays the current value until A‚2.
³
PROGRAM:COUNT
:0"A
Press b.
:Lbl Z
:A+1"A
:Disp "A IS",A
:Pause
:If A‚2
:Stop
:Goto Z
If-Then 8 1 and 2
Use If with Then to execute more than one command (block)
depending upon condition. If condition is true (non-zero),
then block is executed. If condition is false (zero), then block is
skipped. End identifies the end of the block. Both Then and End
must be on a line by itself.
:If condition
:Then
:block (if true)
:End
:command
230 Chapter 12: Programming
Write a program named TEST that tests the values of variable
X. If X<10, manipulate X and Y and then display both values. If
³
X‚10, then display X and Y (without manipulating them).
PROGRAM:TEST
:1"X:10"Y
:If X<10
:Then
:2X+3"X
:2Y-3"Y
:End
:Disp {X,Y}
:Pause
If-Then-Else 8 1, 2, and 3
Use If with Then and Else to execute only one of two blocks of
commands depending upon condition. If condition is true
(non-zero), then block1 is executed. If condition is false
(zero), then block2 is executed. End identifies the end of
block2. Then, Else, and End each must be on a line by itself.
:If condition
:Then
:block1 (if true)
:Else
:block2 (if false)
:End
:command
Chapter 12: Programming 231
Write a program named TESTELSE that tests an input value, X.
If X<0, then square it and store it to Y. If X‚0, then store it to
Y. Display X and Y.
³
PROGRAM:TESTELSE
:Input "X=",X
:If X<0
:Then
:X"Y
:Else
:X"Y
:End
:Disp {X,Y}
:Pause
For( 8 4
Use For( to control how many times a loop is repeated. A For(
command loops to repeat the same group of commands
(block) and increments to control the number of times the loop
is repeated.
It executes commands in block through end, increasing
variable from begin by increment until variable>end.
increment is optional (default=1) and can be negative
(end<begin). end is a maximum or minimum value not to be
exceeded, which identifies the end of the loop. End identifies
the end of block. When variable>end, the program executes
each command following End. For( loops can be nested.
:For(variable,begin,end[,increment])
:block (while variable { end)
:End
:command
Write a program named SQUARE that displays A2, where
0=begin, 8 =end, and 2=increment.
³
Press b
between results.
PROGRAM:SQUARE
:For(A,0,8,2)
:Disp A
:Pause
:End
232 Chapter 12: Programming
While 8 5
Use While to test condition before the commands in the loop
are executed. While performs a block of commands WHILE
condition is true (non-zero). condition is frequently a
relational test (Chapter 2: Math Operations) and is tested
when While is encountered. End identifies the end of block.
When condition is false (zero), the program executes each
command following End. While instructions can be nested.
:While condition
:block (while condition is true)
:End
:command
Write a program named LOOP that increments two variables, I
and J, and displays the value of J when I‚6.
³
PROGRAM:LOOP
:0"I
:0"J
:While I<6
:J+1"J
:I+1"I
:End
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
Repeat 8 6
Use Repeat to test condition after the commands in the loop
are executed. Repeat executes block UNTIL condition is true
(non-zero). It is similar to While, but condition is tested when
End is encountered; therefore, the group of commands is
always executed at least once. When condition is false (zero),
Repeat instructions can be nested.
:Repeat condition
:block (until condition is true)
:End
:command
Chapter 12: Programming 233
Write a program named RPTLOOP that increments two
variables, I and J, and displays the value of J while I‚6.
³
PROGRAM:RPTLOOP
:0"I
:0"J
:Repeat I|6
:J+1"J
:I+1"I
:End
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
End 8 7
End identifies the end of a group of commands. You must
include an End instruction at the end of each For(, While, or
Repeat loop. Also, you must enter an End instruction at the end
of each If-Then group and each If-Then-Else group.
:End
Pause 8 8
After a program has been executed, the screen is erased.
Therefore, Pause is useful to suspend program execution until
you press b, or to display value (such as answers or
graphs) and suspend program execution until you press b.
During the pause, the pause indicator is on in the top-right
corner. Press b to resume execution.
Pause without value temporarily pauses the program. If the
DispGraph or Disp instruction has been executed, the
appropriate screen is displayed.
:Pause
Pause with value displays value on the Home screen. value can
be scrolled.
:Pause value
234 Chapter 12: Programming
Write a program named PAUSE that stores a value to A, an
equation to Y1, graphs Y1 using standard WINDOW values
(ZStandard), pauses, and then displays A.
³
PROGRAM:PAUSE
:2"A
:FnOff
For FnOff and Y1,
Press b
press - } 2 1.
:"X+A""Y
:ZStandard
:Pause
to get to next
screen.
For ZStandard,
press ( 6.
:Disp "A=",A
:Pause
Press b
to end
Lbl and Goto 8 9 and 0
Lbl (label) and Goto are used together for branching.
execution.
Lbl gives a name (label) to a particular location in a program.
label can be one or two text characters (A through Z, 0 through
99).
:Lbl label
Goto causes the program to branch to label when Goto is
encountered.
:Goto label
Write a program named SQUARE2 that asks for an input, A,
squares A, and then displays A until A‚100.
³
PROGRAM:SQUARE2
:Lbl 99
:Input A
:If A|100
:Stop
Press b
after answer is
:Disp A
:Pause
:Goto 99
displayed.
Chapter 12: Programming 235
IS>( 8 A
IS>( (increment and skip if greater than) is used for testing and
branching. IS>( adds 1 to variable. If the answer is > value
(which can be an expression), then command1 is skipped; if
the answer is { value, then command1 is executed.
command2 is always executed. variable cannot be a system
variable. IS>( is not a looping instruction.
:IS>(variable,value)
:command1 (if answer { value)
:command2
Write a program named ISKIP that displays A until A>5.
³
PROGRAM:ISKIP
:0"A
:Lbl S
Press b
between
A values.
:Disp A
:Pause
:IS>(A,5)
:Goto S
:Disp "A IS NOW >5"
:Pause
DS<( 8 B
DS<( (decrement and skip if less than) is used for testing and
branching. DS<( subtracts 1 from variable. If the answer is
< value (which can be an expression), then command1 is
skipped; if the answer is | value, then command1 is executed.
command2 is always executed. variable cannot be a system
variable. DS<( is not a looping instruction.
:DS<(variable,value)
:command1 (if answer | value)
:command2
236 Chapter 12: Programming
Write a program named DSKIP that displays A until A<5.
³
PROGRAM:DSKIP
:9"A
:Lbl S
Press b
between
A values.
:Disp A
:Pause
:DS<(A,5)
:Goto S
:Disp "A IS NOW <5"
:Pause
Menu( 8 C
Menu( generates a menu of up to seven items during program
execution. The pause indicator stays on until you select a
menu item. The calculator then branches to the label
corresponding with that item.
The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks (" ") and can
have up to 16 characters. Up to seven pairs of menu items
follow. Each pair consists of a text item (also enclosed in
quotation marks) to be displayed as a menu selection, and a
label item to which to branch if you select the corresponding
menu selection.
:Menu("title","item1",label1[,"item2",label2,ꢀ])
Write a program named DATES that displays a menu of dates.
Label the title “DATES”, and label option one “JANUARY 16” with
A, label option two “FEBRUARY 19” with B, label option three
“APRIL 9” with C, label option four “JULY 29” with D, label
option five “AUGUST 2” with E, label option six “NOVEMBER 10”
with F, and label option seven “DECEMBER 8” with F.
³
PROGRAM:DATES
:Menu("DATES","JANUARY
16",A,"FEBRUARY 19",B,"APRIL
9",C,"JULY 29",D,"AUGUST
2",E,"NOVEMBER 10",F,"DECEMBER
8",G)
Chapter 12: Programming 237
The program above pauses until you select 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
If you select 2:FEBRUARY 19, for example, the menu disappears
and the program continues execution at Lbl B.
SetMenu( 8 D
Like Menu(, SetMenu( sets up a menu of up to seven items.
During program execution, the user assigns (and edits, as
necessary) numerical values to each item. To assign a value,
enter the value using the number keys, and then press b
or #.
Long values do not wrap; they scroll off the screen, and an
ellipsis (ꢀ) is displayed. Use " and ! to scroll the whole
value. Use $ and # to move between menu items as
necessary.
:SetMenu("title","item1",variable1[,"item2",variable2,ꢀ])
The menu title is enclosed in quotation marks (" ") and can
have up to 16 characters. Up to seven menu items (also
enclosed in quotation marks) follow. During program
execution, the menu displays the first 10 characters of item.
Each item needs a corresponding variable where the entered
value is stored.
The values you enter for the variables (assigned to the menu
items) are stored in the calculator’s memory. Also, if you
assign to a menu item a variable that has been previously
defined in the calculator’s memory, that value displays when
you first execute the program.
Press - l to exit the menu and end program execution.
238 Chapter 12: Programming
Write a program named SETMENU that displays a menu of
³
animal weights. Label the title “WEIGHTS”, show weight values
of five different animals, and allow the user to change the
weight values.
PROGRAM:SETMENU
A, B, and C
were previously
defined.
:SetMenu("WEIGHTS","AARDVARK",
A,"ELEPHANT",B,"ARMADILLO",
C,"MONKEY",D,"KANGAROO",E)
For example, the
ARMADILLO's weight is
assigned to variable C.
Enter new
weights.
prgm 8 E
Use prgm to execute other programs as subroutines. When you
select prgm, it is pasted to the cursor location. Use the Text
editor to enter the characters needed to spell a program name.
Using prgm is equivalent to selecting existing programs from
the 8 EXEC menu (see the section in this chapters entitled
“Calling a Program from Another Program”; however, it
allows you to enter the name of a program that you have not
yet created.
:prgmname
Write two programs named CALCAREA and VOLUME. CALCAREA
calculates the area of a circle. VOLUME inputs the circle
diameter D, and height H, calls CALCAREA as a subroutine,
which calculates the area using D and H, and then displays the
volume of a cylinder .
³
Chapter 12: Programming 239
PROGRAM:VOLUME
:Input "DIAMETER=",D
:Input "HEIGHT=",H
:prgmCALCAREA
:A¦HÜV
Press b
after inputs.
:Disp "VOLUME=",V
:Pause
PROGRAM:CALCAREA
:D/2ÜR
:p¦R ÜA
:Return
Return 8 F
Return quits the subroutine and returns execution to the calling
program, even if it is encountered within nested loops. Any
loops are ended. An implied Return exists at the end of any
program that is called as a subroutine. Within the main
program, Return stops execution and returns to the Home
screen.
:Return
See the program examples (on the previous page), CALCAREA
and VOLUME, explaining the programming command, prgm. The
subroutine, CALCAREA, ends with a Return command.
Stop 8 G
Stop ends program execution and returns to the Home screen.
Stop is optional at the end of a program.
:Stop
Write a program named STOP that inputs T. If T‚20, then the
³
program displays T‚20. If T<20, then the program stops
execution. (Note: The example screens show two program
executions so that you can see what happens with both types
of input.)
240 Chapter 12: Programming
Press b
PROGRAM:STOP
:Input "T=",T
:If T‚20
:Then
after input.
Press b
:Disp "T‚20"
:Pause
:Else
after input.
:Stop
You are returned
to the Home screen.
DelVar 8 H
DelVar (delete variable) deletes the contents of variable from
memory. You cannot delete a program or a system variable.
:DelVar variable
Write a program named DELVAR that deletes the value for
variable A from the calculator’s memory.
³
PROGRAM:DELVAR
:{1,2}ÜL1
Press b.
:Disp L1
:Pause
:DelVar L1
:Disp L1
:Pause
GraphStyle( 8 I
GraphStyle( defines one of seven graph style types for Yn. Yn=1,
2, 3, or 4 (for Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4). The type icons described below
are located to the left of Yn in the Y= editor.
1 = ç (line)
5 = ë (path)
6 = ì (animate)
7 = í (dot)
2 = è (thick line)
3 = é (shade above)
4 = ê (shade below)
:GraphStyle(Y ,type)
Chapter 12: Programming 241
For a detailed description of each graph style, see Chapter 9:
Function Graphing.
Write a program named GRPHSTYL that defines the shade
below graph style for Y1=2X+5 and graphs it.
³
PROGRAM:GRPHSTYL
:FnOff
For FnOff and Y1,
:"2X+5"ÜY
:GraphStyle(1,4)
:ZStandard
press - } 2 1.
For ZStandard, press
( 6.
The 8 I/O Menu
You can only access the 8 I/O (input/output) menu by
pressing 8 " from the Program editor. The 8 I/O menu
instructions allow you to input values and output answers
during program execution.
To return to the Program editor without selecting an item,
press :.
8 " (from the
Program editor only)
1:Input
Lets the user enter a value or display a
graph.
2:Prompt
3:Disp
Prompts the user to enter variable values.
Displays text or values on the Home screen.
Displays the current graph.
4:DispGraph
242 Chapter 12: Programming
5:DispTable
6:Output(
Displays the current table.
Displays text or values at a specified
position.
7:getKey
8:ClrScreen
9:ClrTable
0:GetCalc(
A:Get(
Checks the keyboard for a keystroke.
Clears the Home screen.
Clears the current table.
Gets a variable from another TIN73.
Gets a variable from the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.
Sends a variable to the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.
B:Send(
Input 8 " 1
Input functions in two different ways. You can use it to store to
a variable value or to display the current graph.
Storing to a Variable
Input accepts input and stores it to variable. When the program
is executed, a ? (question mark) prompt (unless otherwise
defined) is displayed. Enter a real number, a list name, or a Yn
function. Then press b, which tells the calculator to
evaluate the input and store the value to variable.
:Input variable
To input lists and expressions during program execution, you
must use the Text editor to include braces ( {} ) around the list
elements and quotation marks (" ") around the expressions
and Yn functions.
You also can display text of up to 16 characters as a prompt.
During program execution, enter a value after the prompt, and
then press b. The value is stored to variable, and the
program resumes execution.
:Input "text",variable
Chapter 12: Programming 243
Write a program named INPUTVAR that inputs two sets of data
and a function, and then solves the function using both of the
data sets.
³
PROGRAM:INPUTVAR
:Input "Y=",Y
For Y1, press
- } 2 1.
:Input "A=",A
For ¨, press
:Input "¨DATA=",¨DATA
- v " 9.
Surround Y1
:Disp "Y(A)=",Y(A)
:Pause
:Disp "Y(¨DATA)=",Y(¨DATA)
with quotation marks.
Enclose list in { }.
:Pause
Press b between
data displays.
Displaying the Current Graph
Input, with no arguments, displays the current graph. Once the
graph screen is shown, you can move the free-moving cursor,
which updates X and Y by a value of .1. The pause indicator is
displayed. Press b to resume program execution. The
Home screen then displays the X- and Y-coordinates.
:Input
Write a program named GRPHINPT that gets input from the
graph screen (the (X,Y) coordinates of the cursor’s position)
and displays the values on the Home screen.
³
PROGRAM:GRPHINPT
Move cursor to
desired location,
For FnOff, press
:FnOff
- } 2 6. For
PlotsOff, select
- e 4.
:PlotsOff
:ZDecimal
:Input
and press
b
.
:Disp X,Y
:Pause
For ZDecimal, press
X=2.6;
Y=1.5.
( 8.
244 Chapter 12: Programming
Prompt 8 " 2
During program execution, Prompt displays the specified
variables followed by =?, one at a time on separate lines.
During program execution, the user enters a value or
expression for each variable, and then presses b. The
values are stored, and the program resumes execution. Yn
functions are not valid with Prompt.
:Prompt variableA[,variableB,variableCꢀ]
Write a program named WINDOW that requests inputs to be
stored to WINDOW variables.
³
PROGRAM:WINDOW
For WINDOW
variables, press
- } 1.
:Prompt Xmin
:Prompt Xmax
:Prompt Ymin
:Prompt Ymax
Disp 8 " 3
Disp displays one or more variable values during program
execution. To display text, surround the text with quotation
marks.
:Disp valueA[,valueB,valueC,…]
:Disp "text"[,valueA]
Pause after Disp halts execution temporarily so that you can
examine the screen. To resume execution, press b. If a
list is too large to display in its entirety, an ellipsis (…) is
displayed in the last column, but the list cannot be scrolled.
•
•
•
If value is a variable, the current value stored to the
variable is displayed.
If value is an expression, it is evaluated and the result is
displayed on the right side of the next line.
If value is text within quotation marks, it is displayed on
the left side of the current display line. " is not valid as
text.
Chapter 12: Programming 245
Write a program named DISPNOTE that displays the messages,
³
“I LOVE MATH” and “TEST1 GRADE=95”.
PROGRAM:DISPNOTE
:Disp "I LOVE MATH"
:Pause
Press b.
:Disp "TEST1 GRADE=",95
:Pause
DispGraph 8 " 4
DispGraph (display graph) displays the graph of all defined and
selected Yn functions during program execution. If Pause is
encountered after DispGraph, the program halts temporarily so
that you can examine the screen. Press b to resume
execution.
:DispGraph
DispTable 8 " 5
DispTable (display table) displays the table for all defined and
selected Yn functions during program execution. If Pause is
encountered after DispTable, the program halts temporarily so
that you can examine the screen. Press b to resume
execution.
:DispTable
Output( 8 " 6
Output( displays text or value on the Home screen beginning at
row (1-8) and column (1-16), overwriting any existing
characters. You may want to precede Output( with ClrScreen.
Expressions are evaluated and values are displayed according
to the current mode settings. " is not valid as text.
:Output(row,column,"text")
:Output(row,column,value)
246 Chapter 12: Programming
Write a program named OUTPUT that writes the contents of B
to a specific area on the screen.
³
PROGRAM:OUTPUT
:3+5"B
:ClrScreen
:Output(5,4,"ANSWER: ")
:Output(5,12,B)
:Pause
getKey 8 " 7
getKey returns a number corresponding to the last key pressed,
according to the following key code diagram. If no key has
been pressed, getKey returns 0. Use getKey inside loops to
transfer control, for example, when creating programs that use
a key to control the logic flow.
:getKey
TIN73 Key Code Diagram
^ has no number associated with it.
It stops program execution.
Chapter 12: Programming 247
³ Write a program named GETKEY that displays the key code for
the last key pressed, represented as variable K. End the
program when K=45 (:).
PROGRAM:GETKEY
:Lbl A
:0"K
:While K=0
:getKey"K
:End
: (45)
:Disp K
:If Kƒ45
:Goto A
stops execution.
ClrScreen and ClrTable 8 " 8 and 9
ClrScreen (clear Home screen) clears the Home screen during
program execution.
:ClrScreen
ClrTable (clear table) clears the values in the table during
program execution.
:ClrTable
GetCalc( 8 " 0
GetCalc( gets the contents of variable from another TIN73 and
stores it to variable on the receiving 73. variable can be a real
number, list element, list name, Yn variable, or picture.
:GetCalc(variable)
You can access GetCalc( from the CATALOG (- |) to
execute it from the Home screen.
Get( and Send( 8 " A and B
Get( gets data from the Calculator-Based Laboratoryè
(CBL 2™, CBL™), or Calculator-Based Rangerè (CBRè)
system and stores it to variable on the receiving TIN73.
variable can be a real number, list element, list name, Yn
variable, or picture.
248 Chapter 12: Programming
:Get(variable)
Send( sends the contents of variable to the CBL 2/CBL or CBR.
You cannot use it to send to another TIN73. variable can be a
real number, list element, list name, Yn variable, or picture.
variable can be a list of elements.
:Send(variable)
³ Write a program named GETSOUND that gets sound data and
time in seconds from a CBL 2/CBL.
PROGRAM:GETSOUND
:Send({3,.00025,99,1,0,0,0,0,
1})
:Get(L1)
:Get(L2)
Editing Program Commands
To edit a stored program, select the program name that you
want to edit from the 8 EDIT menu. The calculator displays
the Program editor and all existing program lines for that
program.
The 8 EDIT menu lists in alphabetical order all created
programs. From this list, select the program you want to edit.
The calculator then displays the Program editor which
displays all existing programming commands that make up the
selected program.
This menu labels the first 10 items using 1 though 9, then 0. All
other programs are still included in the list but are not labeled
with a number. To select a menu item, press the number
associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor keys,
and then press b.
8 "
Chapter 12: Programming 249
Inserting, Deleting, and Editing Command Lines
•
To insert a new command line anywhere in the program,
place the cursor where you want the new characters,
press - m, and then press b. A colon indicates a
new line.
•
•
To insert characters on an existing line, place the cursor
where you want the new line, press - m, and then
enter the new characters.
To delete a command line, place the cursor on the line,
press : to clear all instructions and expressions on
the line, and then press / to delete the command line,
including the colon.
•
To move the cursor to the beginning of a command line,
press - !; to move to the end, press - ".
Copying and Renaming a Program
You can copy all command lines from one program into a new
or existing program.
•
•
To copy into a new program, use the (8 " ") menu
to create and name the new program. The calculator then
automatically displays the Program editor with the
program name on the top line.
To copy into an existing program, use the 8 EDIT
(8 ") menu and select the existing program name.
The calculator then automatically displays the Program
editor with the existing program name on the top line.
250 Chapter 12: Programming
Then follow these steps:
1. Position the cursor where you want the copy of the
program to begin.
2. Press - P. Rcl is displayed on the bottom line of the
Program editor.
3. Press 8 " " to display the 8 EXEC menu.
4. Select a name from the menu. prgmname is pasted to the
bottom line of the Program editor. You cannot directly
enter the subroutine name using the Text editor when
using Rcl. You must select the name from the 8 EXEC
menu.)
5. Press b. All command lines from the selected
program are copied into the new or existing program.
Calling a Program from Another Program
The 8 EXEC (execute) menu (8 " "), accessed only
from the Program editor, lets you call any stored program into
the current program. The called program then becomes a
subroutine in the current program.
The 8 EXEC menu lists in alphabetical order all created
programs. From this list, select the program that you want to
call. The program name is pasted to the cursor location in the
Program editor.
This menu labels the first 10 items using 1 though 9, then 0. All
other programs are still included in the list, but are not labeled
with a number. To select a menu item, press the number
associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor keys,
and then press b.
You also can enter a program name on a command line by
selecting E:prgm from the 8 CTL menu, and then entering
the program name using the Text editor.
Chapter 12: Programming 251
8 " " (from the
Program editor only)
When prgmname is encountered during execution, the next
command that the program executes is the first command in
the subroutine. It returns to the subsequent command in the
first program when it encounters either Return or the implied
Return at the end of the second program.
Notes about Calling Programs
•
Variables are global.
•
label used with Goto and Lbl is local to the program where
it is located. label in one program is not recognized by
another program. You cannot use Goto to branch to a
label in another program.
•
Return exits a subroutine and returns to the calling
program, even if it is encountered within nested loops.
Executing a Program
The 8 EXEC (execute) menu lists in alphabetical order all
created programs. From this list, select the program that you
want to execute. The program name is pasted to the cursor
location on the Home screen. Pressing b begins executing
the program. Pressing b after a program is completed
returns you to the Home screen.
The 8 EXEC menu labels the first 10 items using 1 though 9,
then 0. All other programs are still included in the list, but are
not labeled with a number. To select a menu item, press the
number associated with it or highlight the item with the cursor
keys, and then press b.
252 Chapter 12: Programming
8 (except from the
Program editor)
Breaking Out of a Program
To stop program execution, press ^. The ERR:BREAK menu is
displayed.
•
•
To return to the Home screen, select 1:Quit.
To go where the interruption occurred, select 2:Goto.
Debugging a Program
The TIN73 checks for program errors during program
execution. It does not check for errors as you enter a program.
If the calculator finds an error during program execution, it
stops execution and then displays an error screen.
•
•
To return to the Home screen, press 1:Quit.
To go where the error occurred in the program code,
select 2:Goto.
Communication Link
and the CBL/CBR
Application
13
TIN73 Link Capabilities ......................................................254
Linking to Another Calculator ...................................254
Linking to the CBL 2/CBL System or CBR....................255
The Link SEND Menu 9 1.............................................255
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 " .................................257
Transmitting Data Items....................................................258
Repeating a Transmission to an Additional TIN73....259
DuplicateName Menu.................................................259
Transmission Error Conditions....................................260
Backing Up Memory..........................................................261
Upgrading your TIN73 Graph Explorer Software.............262
Graph Explorer Software Upgrades...........................262
Where to Get Upgrades..............................................262
How to Install Upgrades.............................................262
Backing Up Your Unit before an Installation............263
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9 ......................................263
Steps for Running the CBLàCBR Application...................264
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application...................................265
Specifying the Data Collection Method...........................265
Specifiying Data Collection Options.................................266
GAUGE.........................................................................266
DATA LOGGER.............................................................269
RANGER .......................................................................272
Collecting the Data ...........................................................273
Stopping Data Collection..................................................274
254 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
TI-73 Link Capabilities
The TIN73 comes with a unit-to-unit link cable. With this cable,
you can connect to and communicate with another TIN73, a
TIN82, a TIN83, the Calculator-Based Laboratory™ (CBL 2™,
CBL™), or the Calculator-Based Rangerè (CBRè). You can
communicate with a personal computer using TI™ Connect or
TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a TI-GRAPH LINK cable.
For information about any of these accessories, contact Texas
Instruments Customer Support (see Appendix C:
BatteryàService and Warranty Information).
To connect the TIN73 to another device using the unit-to-unit
cable, use the link port located at the center of the bottom
edge of the calculator.
1. Insert either end of the unit-to-unit cable into the TIN73
port very firmly.
2. Insert the other end of the cable into the port of the other
device.
Linking to Another Calculator
By linking two TI-73’s you can transfer all variables and
programs to another TIN73 or back up the entire RAM
(Random Access Memory) of a TIN73. To transmit from one
TIN73 to another, you first must set up one TIN73 to send and
the other to receive using the 9 1:Link SEND and RECEIVE
menus (see page 255 and 257).
Linking a TIN73 to a TIN82 or TIN83 lets you transfer some
types of data between the calculators. Use the 9 1:Link
SEND menu items 9:Vars to TI82 and 0:Vars to TI83 (see page 256).
•
You can only transfer numerical list data stored in L1–L6
(NOT categorical lists) to a TIN82. All fractional elements
are converted to decimals.
If dimension>99 for a TIN73 list that is selected to be sent
to a TIN82, the TIN82 truncates the list at the 99th element
during transmission.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 255
•
•
You can only transfer numerical list data stored in L1–L6
or user-named numerical lists to a TIN83 (NOT
categorical lists). All fractional elements are converted to
decimals.
From a TIN82 or a TIN83 to a TIN73, you cannot perform a
memory backup (but you can send real numbers, real
number lists, and picture variables).
Linking to the CBL 2/CBL System or CBR
Connect a CBL 2/CBL or CBR to a TIN73 using one of the
unit-to-unit link cables that are included with the calculator,
the CBR and the CBL 2/CBL. See the section entitled,
“Selecting the CBL/CBR Application” in this chapter.
Linking to a PC or Macintoshè
TI-GRAPH LINKè is an optional application that connects to a
TIN73 to enable communications with a personal computer.
The Link SEND Menu 9 1
You choose the type of data you want to send from the TIN73
to another device from the 9 1:Link SEND menu.
To communicate between two calculators, you must set up
one calculator to send the data and the other calculator to
receive the data. The following section describes how to set
up the TIN73 to send data. To set up a TIN82 or TIN83, refer to
its user manual.
9 1
256 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
1:All+…
Displays all RAM items as selected.
Displays all RAM items as deselected.
Displays all program names.
Displays all list names.
2:All–…
3:Prgm…
4:List…
5:Pic…
Displays all picture data types.
Displays all real variables.
Displays all Yn variables.
6:Real…
7:Y-Vars…
8:Consts…
9:Vars to TI82…
Displays all constants.
Displays list names L1-L6 that are
defined as numerical lists, real number
variables and picture variables.
0:Vars to TI83…
Displays list names that are defined as
numerical lists, real number variables,
and picture variables.
A:Apps…
Displays all software applications.
B:AppVars…
Displays all software applications
variables.
C:SendId
Sends the Calculator ID number
immediately. (You do not need to
select TRANSMIT.)
D:Back Up…
Selects all RAM for backup to a TIN73.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 257
To select data items to send from the sending unit to another
calculator, follow these steps:
1. Press 9 to display the APPLICATIONS menu.
2. Select 1:Link to display the Link SEND menu.
3. Select the type of data you want to send. The
corresponding SELECT screen is displayed. Each SELECT
screen, except the one for All+, is displayed initially with
no data items selected.
4. Press $ and # to move the selection cursor (4) to an
item you want to select or deselect.
5. Press b to select or deselect an item. Selected names
are marked with a black box (0). To exit a SELECT screen
without transmitting any items, press - l.
SELECT LIST screen includes L1-L6
and any user-named lists.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select or deselect additional
items.
The Link RECEIVE Menu 9 1 "
You set up the TIN73 to receive data from another device using
the 9 1:Link RECEIVE menu.
To communicate between two calculators, you must set up
one calculator to send the data and the other calculator to
receive the data. The following section describes how to set
up the TIN73 to receive data. To set up a TIN82 or TIN83, refer
to its user manual.
9 1 "
1:Receive
Sets unit to receive data transmission.
258 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
To set up the TIN73 to receive data, follow these steps:
1. Press 9 to display the APPLICATIONS menu.
2. Select 1:Link and press " to display the Link RECEIVE
menu.
3. Select 1:Receive. The message Waiting… and the busy
indicator are displayed. The receiving unit is ready to
receive transmitted items.
To exit the receive mode without receiving items, press
^, and then select 1:Quit from the Error in Xmit menu.
When transmission is complete, the unit is still in the
receive mode. Press - l to exit the receive mode.
Transmitting Data Items
To transmit data items from a TIN73, follow these steps:
1. Select items to send on the sending unit. Keep the SELECT
screen displayed on the sending unit (see page 257).
2. Set the receiving unit to receive mode (see page 257).
3. Press " on the TIN73 to display the TRANSMIT menu.
4. Confirm that Waiting… is displayed on the receiving unit,
which indicates it is set to receive.
5. Select 1:Transmit. The name and type of each data item are
displayed line by line on the sending unit as the item is
queued for transmission, and then on the receiving unit as
each item is accepted.
6. After all selected items have been transmitted, the
message Done is displayed on both calculators. Press $
and # to scroll through the names.
To stop a transmission, press ^. The Error in Xmit menu is
displayed on both units. To leave the error menu, select 1:Quit.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 259
During transmission, if the receiving unit does not have
sufficient memory to receive an item, the Memory Full menu is
displayed on the receiving unit.
•
To skip this item for the current transmission, select
1:Omit. Transmission resumes with the next item.
•
To cancel the transmission and exit transmission mode,
select 2:Quit.
Repeating a Transmission to an Additional TI-73
After sending and receiving data between two TIN73s, you can
repeat the same transmission without having to reselect data
items to send. Use the original sending unit only and as many
additional TIN73 units as necessary.
Simply repeat the transmission process without selecting or
deselecting any new items. Note: You cannot repeat the
transmission if you selected All+ or All-.
DuplicateName Menu
During transmission, if a variable name is duplicated, the
DuplicateName menu is displayed on the receiving TIN73.
The duplicate variable name, L1,
and its type, LIST, are displayed.
1:Rename
Prompts you to rename the receiving
variable.
2:Overwrite
Overwrites data while receiving the
variable.
3:Omit
4:Quit
Skips transmission of sending variable.
Stops transmission.
260 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
•
When you select 1:Rename, the Name= prompt is displayed,
and you can enter another appropriate variable name
using the - } menu (for example, renaming Pic1 to
Pic2 where Pic2 is undefined), or you can enter text using
the Text editor (- t) (for example, renaming L1 to
¨ABC where ¨ABC is undefined). When renaming lists, do
not enter the ¨ (- v OPS 9). The calculator assumes
that it is a list name. Press b to resume transmission.
Note: You cannot rename software applications or
constants (the 1:Rename option is excluded from the
DuplicateName menu).
•
•
•
When you select 2:Overwrite, the sending unit’s data
overwrites the existing data stored on the receiving unit.
Transmission resumes.
When you select 3:Omit, the sending unit does not send
the data in the duplicated variable name. Transmission
resumes with the next item.
When you select 4:Quit, transmission stops, and the
receiving unit exits receive mode.
Transmission Error Conditions
A transmission error (Error in Xmit) occurs after one or two
seconds if:
•
The unit-to-unit cable is not attached to the sending or
receiving unit. Note: If the cable is attached, push it in
firmly and try again.
•
•
The receiving unit is not set to receive transmission.
You attempt a backup between a TIN73 and a TIN82 or
TIN83.
•
You attempt a data transfer from a TIN73 to a TIN82 with
data other than numerical lists, L1-L6, or without using
menu item 9:Vars to TI82.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 261
•
You attempt a data transfer from a TIN73 to a TIN83 with
data other than numerical lists, L1-L6, or user-named
numerical lists, or without using menu item 0:Vars to TI83.
Although a transmission error does not occur, these two
conditions may prevent successful transmission:
•
You try to use Get( with a calculator instead of a
CBL 2/CBL.
•
You try to use GetCalc( with a TIN82 or TIN83 instead of a
TIN73.
Backing Up Memory
The TIN73 includes two types of memory: RAM (Random
Access Memory) and F-ROM (Flash Read Only Memory). RAM
includes all lists, programs, variables, and equations. F-ROM
includes software applications, such as the CBLàCBR
application (9 2).
To copy (and overwrite) the exact contents of RAM in the
sending TIN73 to the memory of the receiving TIN73, follow
these steps:
1. Set up the receiving unit in receive mode (see page 257).
2. Then, on the sending unit, select D:Back Up from the Link
SEND menu.
3. Select 1:Transmit from the MEMORYBACKUP menu on the
sending unit to begin transmission. Selecting 2:Quit
returns you to the Link SEND menu.
4. As a safety check to prevent accidental loss of memory,
the message WARNING–BACKUP is displayed when the
receiving unit receives notice of a backup.
Select 1:Continue to begin the backup transmission.
Select 2:Quit to prevent the backup and return to the Link
SEND menu.
When the backup is complete, both the sending calculator and
receiving calculator display a MEMORY BACKUP confirmation
screen. If a transmission error occurs during a backup, the
receiving unit’s memory is reset.
262 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
Upgrading your TI-73 Graph Explorer
Software
You can upgrade the software, or operating system, on your
TIN73. You do this by transferring this software from a
computer to your TIN73 using the TI Connect™ or
TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a TI-GRAPH LINK cable.
Graph Explorer Software Upgrades
You can upgrade two different types of software. These are
stored in F-ROM. Therefore, this software is unaffected if you
select - Ÿ 7:Reset 1:All RAM. These include:
•
New versions which enhance the existing software
(released free of charge).
•
Feature upgrades which modify or add functionality to
existing software (available for purchase).
If you want to download these feature upgrades, which
must be purchased from the TI web site, you must provide
the unique ID number that identifies your TIN73. To find
the ID number, press - Ÿ 1:About.
Where to Get Upgrades
For up-to-date information about available upgrades and how
to install them, check the TI web site at
education.ti.com or contact Texas Instruments as
described in Appendix C: BatteryàService and Warranty
Information.
How to Install Upgrades
To install new Graph Explorer Software, including free or
purchased upgrades and applications, you need your TIN73, a
computer, TI Connect or TI-GRAPH LINK software, and a
TI-GRAPH LINK cable. Extensive directions for installing
upgrades are provided on the web site at education.ti.com.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 263
1. Transfer the software from the web site to your
computer.
2. Transfer the software from the computer to your unit.
Backing Up Your Unit before an Installation
When you install new operating system software, the
installation process:
•
•
Deletes all user-defined data items located in RAM.
Resets all system variables and modes to their original
factory settings. This is equivalent to using the MEMORY
RESET menu to reset all memory.
To retain any existing data items, do either of the following
before installing the upgrade:
•
Transmit the data items to another TIN73 as described on
page 258.
•
Use the TI Connect™ or TI-GRAPH LINK™ software and a
TI-GRAPH LINK cable to send the data items to a
computer.
The APPLICATIONS Menu 9
For the TIN73, you can buy additional software applications,
which allow you to customize further your calculator’s
functionality. The calculator reserves four spaces
(placeholders) within ROM memory specifically for
applications. The TIN73 comes with the CBLàCBR application
already listed on the APPLICATIONS menu (9 2).
264 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
Steps for Running the
CBLàCBR Application
Follow these basic steps when using the CBLàCBR
application. You may not have to do all of them each time.
9 2
b
Select the CBLàCBR application.
b
Specify the data collection method.
Select options, as applicable.
1, 2, or 3
Highlight options
or enter value
and press b.
Select Go… or
Collect the data.
START NOW.
Follow directions, if applicable.
^ and
¤ or
P
Stop the data collection, if
necessary. Repeat these steps or
exit the APPLICATIONS menu.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 265
Selecting the CBL/CBR Application
You access the CBL/CBR application by pressing 9. In order
to use a CBL/CBR application, you need a CBL 2/CBL or CBR
(as applicable), a TIN73, and a unit-to-unit link cable.
9
Select 2:CBL/CBR to set up the TIN73 to use either of the
applications. An informational screen first appears. Press any
key to continue to the next menu.
9 2
Specifying the Data Collection Method
With a CBL 2/CBL or CBR, you can collect data in one of three
ways: GAUGE (bar or meter), DATA LOGGER (a Temp-Time,
Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Sonic-Time graph), or RANGER,
which runs the RANGER program, the built-in CBR data
collection program.
CBL 2/CBL and CBR differ in that CBL 2/CBL allows you to
collect data using one of four different probes: Temperature,
Light, Volt, or Sonic. CBR collects data using only the Sonic
probe. You can find more information on CBL 2/CBL and CBR
in their user manuals.
266 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
9 2 b
1:GAUGE
Represents results as either a bar or
meter. Compatible with CBL 2/CBL or
CBR.
2:DATA LOGGER
Represents results as a Temp-Time,
Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Sonic-Time
graph. Compatible with CBL 2/CBL or
CBR.
3:RANGER
Sets up and runs the RANGER program
and represents results as a
Distance-Time, Velocity-Time, or
Acceleration-Time graph. Compatible
with CBR only.
4:QUIT
Quits the CBLàCBR application.
Specifiying Data Collection Options
After you select a data collection method, a screen showing
the options for that method is displayed. The method you
choose, as well as the data collection options you choose for
that method, determine whether you use the CBR or the
CBL 2/CBL. Refer to the charts in the following sections to
find the options for the application you are using.
GAUGE
9 2 b
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 267
1
The GAUGE data collection method lets you choose one of four
different probes: Temp, Light, Volt, or Sonic. You can use the
CBL 2/CBL with all probes; you can use the CBR only with the
Sonic probe.
When you select a PROBE option, all other options change
accordingly. Use " and ! to move between the PROBE
options. To select a probe, highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press b.
GAUGE Options (Defaults)
Temp
Light
Volt
Sonic
TYPE:
Bar or Meter
MIN:
0
0
1
M10
10
0
6
MAX:
100
UNITS:
DIRECTNS:
¡C or ¡F mWàcm2
On or Off
Volt
m or Ft
TYPE
The GAUGE data collection results are represented according
to TYPE: Bar or Meter. Highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press b.
Bar
Meter
268 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
MIN and MAX
MIN and MAX refer to the minimum and maximum UNIT values
for the specified PROBE. Defaults are listed in the table on page
267. See the CBL 2/CBL and CBR guidebook for specific
MINàMAX ranges. Enter values using the number keys.
UNITS
The results are displayed according to the UNITS specified. To
specify a unit measurement (Temp or Sonic probes only),
highlight the one you want using the cursor keys, and then
press b.
DIRECTNS (Directions)
If DIRECTNS=On, the calculator displays step-by-step directions
on the screen, which help you set up and run the data
collection. To select On or Off, highlight the one you want with
the cursor keys, and then press b.
With the Sonic data collection probe, if DIRECTNS=On, the
calculator displays a menu screen before starting the
application asking you to select 1:CBL or 2:CBR. This ensures
that you get the appropriate directions. Press 1 to specify CBL
or 2 to specify CBR.
Data Collection Comments and Results
To label a specific data point, press b to pause the data
collection. You see a Comment= prompt. Enter up to a
six-character comment using the Text editor (- t) or
number keys. The calculator automatically converts the
comment labels and the corresponding results into list
elements using the following list names (you cannot rename
these lists):
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 269
Probe Comment Labels (X) Data Results (Y)
Stored to:
Stored to:
Temp
Light
Volt
¨TCMNT
¨LCMNT
¨VCMNT
¨DCMNT
¨TEMP
¨LIGHT
¨VOLT
¨DIST
Sonic
To see all elements in one of these lists, you can insert these
lists into the List editor just as you would any other list.
Access list names from the - v Ls menu.
CAUTION: These lists are only temporary placeholders for
comment labels and data results for any particular probe.
Therefore, every time you collect data and enter comments for
one of the four probes, the two lists pertaining to that probe
are overwritten with comment labels and data results from the
most recently collected data.
If you want to save comment labels and data results from
more than one data collection, copy all list elements that you
want to save to a list with a different name.
Also, the DATA LOGGER data collection method stores data
results to the same list names, overwriting previously-
collected data results, even those collected using the GAUGE
data collection method.
DATA LOGGER
9 2 b
2
270 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
The DATA LOGGER data collection method lets you choose one
of four different probes: Temp, Light, Volt, or Sonic. You can use
the CBL 2/CBL with all probes; you can use the CBR only with
the Sonic probe.
When you select a PROBE option, all other options change
accordingly. Use " and ! to move between the PROBE
options. To select a probe, highlight the one you want with the
cursor keys, and then press b.
DATA LOGGER Options (Defaults)
Temp
Light
Volt
99
Sonic
50
#SAMPLES:
INTRVL (SEC):
UNITS:
99
1
99
1
1
1
¡C or ¡F mWàcm2
Volt
m or Ft
PLOT:
RealTme or End
DIRECTNS:
Ymin ('):
Ymax ('):
On or Off
0
6
The DATA LOGGER data collection results are represented as a
Temp-Time, Light-Time, Volt-Time, or Distance-Time graph.
Probe-Time Graph
A Distance-Time graph in
meters (Sonic probe).
#SAMPLES
#SAMPLES refers to how many data samples are collected and
then graphed. For example, if #SAMPLES=99, data collection
stops after the 99th sample is collected. Enter values using the
number keys.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 271
INTRVL (SEC)
INTRVL (SEC) specifies the interval in seconds between each
data sample that is collected. For example, if you want to
collect 99 samples and INTRVL=1, it takes 99 seconds to finish
data collection. Enter values using the number keys. See the
CBR or CBL 2/CBL guidebook for more information about
interval limits.
UNITS
The results are displayed according to the UNITS specified. To
specify a unit measurement (Temp or Sonic only), highlight the
one you want using the cursor keys, and then press b.
PLOT
You can specify whether you want the calculator to collect
realtime (RealTme) samples, which means that the calculator
graphs data points immediately as they are being collected, or
you can wait and show the graph only after all data points
have been collected (End). Highlight the option you want with
the cursor keys, and then press b.
Ymin and Ymax
To specify Ymin and Ymax values for the final graph, press
' to view the PLOT WINDOW screen. Use $ and # to
move between options. Enter Ymin and Ymax using the number
keys. Press - l to return to the DATA LOGGER options
screen.
DIRECTNS (Directions)
If DIRECTNS=On, the calculator displays step-by-step directions
on the screen, which help you set up and run the data
collection. To select On or Off, highlight the one you want with
the cursor keys, and then press b.
With the Sonic data collection probe, if DIRECTNS=On, the
calculator displays a menu screen before starting the
application asking you to select 1:CBL or 2:CBR. This ensures
that you get the appropriate directions. Press 1 to specify CBL
or 2 to specify CBR.
272 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
Data Collection Results
The calculator automatically converts all collected data points
into list elements using the following list names (you cannot
rename the lists):
Probe Time Values (X)
Data Results (Y)
stored to:
Stored to:
Temp
Light
Volt
¨TTEMP
¨TLGHT
¨TVOLT
¨TDIST
¨TEMP
¨LIGHT
¨VOLT
¨DIST
Sonic
To see all elements in one of these lists, you can insert these
lists into the List editor just as you would any other list.
Access list names from the - v Ls menu.
CAUTION: These lists are only temporary placeholders for
data results for any particular probe. Therefore, every time
you collect data for one of the four probes, the list pertaining
to that probe is overwritten with data results from the most
recently collected data.
If you want to save data results from more than one data
collection, copy all list elements that you want to save to a list
with a different name.
Also, the GAUGE data collection method stores data results to
the same list names, overwriting previously-collected data
results, even those collected using the DATA LOGGER data
collection method.
RANGER
Selecting the RANGER data collection method runs the CBR
RANGER program, a customized program especially for the
TIN73 which makes it compatible with the CBR.
Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application 273
9 2 b 3
b
For detailed information about the RANGER program as well as
option explanations, see the Getting Started with CBRè
guidebook.
Note: If you execute the RANGER data collection method, the
program name, RANGER, appears in the 8 EXEC menu. You
can’t edit the program, but you can execute it from this menu,
just as you would another program. If you delete RANGER from
the 8 EXEC menu (- Ÿ 4:Delete 6:Prgm), you can no
longer access RANGER from this menu; you must select 9
2:CBLàCBR 3:RANGER.
The RANGER data collection method only uses the Sonic probe.
Collecting the Data
After you specify all of the options for your data collection
method, select the Go option from the GAUGE or DATA LOGGER
options screen. If you are using the RANGER data collection
method, select 1:SETUPàSAMPLE from the MAIN MENU menu, and
then START NOW.
274 Chapter 13: Link and the CBLàCBR Application
•
•
If DIRECTNS=Off, GAUGE and DATA LOGGER data collection
begin immediately.
If DIRECTNS=On, the calculator displays step-by-step
directions.
If PROBE=Sonic, the calculator first displays a menu screen
asking you to select 1:CBL or 2:CBR. This ensures that you
get the appropriate directions. Press 1 to specify CBL or 2
to specify CBR.
•
If you select START NOW from the MAIN MENU of the
RANGER data collection method, the calculator displays
one directions screen. Press b to begin data
collection.
Stopping Data Collection
To stop the GAUGE data collection method, press : on the
TIN73.
The DATA LOGGER and RANGER data collection methods stop
after the specified number of samples have been collected. To
stop them before this happens:
1. Press ^ on the TIN73.
2. Press ¤ on the CBR, T on the CBL 2, or
P on the CBL.
To exit from the GAUGE or DATA LOGGER option menus
without beginning data collection, press - l.
To exit from the RANGER option menu without beginning data
collection, select MAIN MENU. Select 6:QUIT to return to the
CBLàCBR APP menu.
Press 4:QUIT from the CBLàCBR APP menu to return to the
TIN73 Home screen.
Memory
Management
14
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu ..........................................276
About - Ÿ 1.......................................................276
Check RAM - Ÿ 2..............................................277
Check APPs - Ÿ 3 ..............................................277
Delete - Ÿ 4 ......................................................278
Clear Home - Ÿ 5..............................................279
ClrAllLists - Ÿ 6.................................................280
Reset - Ÿ 7 ........................................................280
276 Chapter 14: Memory Management
The - Ÿ MEMORY Menu
At any time, you can check available memory or manage
existing memory by selecting items from the - Ÿ MEMORY
menu.
- Ÿ
1:About
Displays information about the
calculator.
2:Check RAM
Reports memory availability and variable
usage.
3:Check APPs
4:Delete
Reports availability of application spaces.
Displays the DELETE FROM menu.
Clears the Home screen.
5:Clear Home
6:ClrAllLists
7:Reset
Clears all lists in memory.
Displays the RESET menu, which allows
you to reset all RAM memory or all
defaults.
About - Ÿ 1
About displays information about your TIN73. To leave the
About screen and return to the Home screen, press either -
l or :.
GRAPH EXPLORER SOFTWARE
Version
X.X
PROD. ID:02-X-XX-XX
ID:XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXX
Number
- Ÿ 1
Help:education.ti.com
Chapter 14: Memory Management 277
Check RAM - Ÿ 2
Check RAM displays the MEM FREE screen. The top line reports
the total amount of available memory. The remaining lines
report the amount of memory each variable type is using. You
can check this screen to see whether you need to delete
variables from memory to make room for new data.
To leave the MEM FREE screen, press either - l or :.
- Ÿ 2
Check APPs - Ÿ 3
Check Apps displays the Spaces Free screen, which displays
application memory available on the calculator. Four spaces in
the calculator’s memory are reserved for applications. The
TIN73 comes with the CBLàCBR application already loaded.
Since applications take up no RAM memory, selecting
- Ÿ 4:Delete 1:All doesn’t delete any applications. Instead,
delete an application using - Ÿ 4:Delete 8: Apps.
The Spaces Free screen displays how many spaces are free as
well as the names of all loaded applications and the spaces
each one occupies. (Any application can occupy anywhere
from one to four spaces depending upon its size.)
To leave the Spaces Free screen and return to the Home screen,
press either - l or :.
For more information on running applications on the TIN73,
see Chapter 13: Communication Link and the CBLàCBR
Application.
278 Chapter 14: Memory Management
- Ÿ 3
Delete - Ÿ 4
To increase available RAM memory or application space, you
can delete the contents of any type of system variable. You
also can delete applications or the application variable,
AppVars. Delete displays a menu of types of variables from
which you can select. Selecting a type displays a DELETE:type
screen of specific variables to delete.
To leave any DELETE:type screen without deleting anything,
press - l, which displays the Home screen. Some system
variables, such as the last-answer variable Ans and the
statistical variable RegEQ are not listed and cannot be deleted.
- Ÿ 4
To delete from the DELETE FROM screen:
1. Press - Ÿ 4:Delete to display the DELETE FROM
secondary menu.
2. Select the data type of the variable you want to delete, or
select 1:All for a list of all variables of all types. The
DELETE: type menu is displayed, listing each specific
variable of the type you selected and the number of bytes
each variable is using.
3. Press $ and # to move the selection cursor (8) next to
the variable you want to delete, and then press b.
The variable is deleted from memory. Repeat, as
necessary.
Chapter 14: Memory Management 279
List - Ÿ 4 3
In addition to deleting lists from the DELETE:List menu, you
also can delete IDList. The IDList stores any additional IDs that
have been collected from other calculators (using the 9
1:Link 1:Receive feature). Therefore, at any time you can delete
IDList, just as you would delete any other variable.
The - Ÿ 2:Check RAM MEM FREE screen adds all statistical
list and IDList memory bytes together and displays the total
after the List.
Apps and AppVars - Ÿ 4 8 and 9
Apps allows you to delete individual applications that have
been stored on the calculator. Individual applications are not
deleted when you select - Ÿ 4:Delete 1:All because they
are stored in ROM memory (as opposed to RAM).
AppVars is a variable holder used to store variables created by
independent applications, but which are not recognized by the
TIN73. For example, if you create a matrix with an application
and save it to the calculator’s memory, the calculator stores it
in AppVars since matrices are not recognized by the TIN73.
In addition, you cannot edit or change variables in AppVars
unless you do so through the application which created them.
For more information on running applications, see Chapter 13:
Link Communication and the CBLàCBR Application.
Clear Home - Ÿ 5
Clear Home not only clears the Home screen (like ClrScreen) but
also clears all previous entries stored in - £ (unlike
ClrScreen). In addition, all previous entries displayed on the
Home screen are erased. To cancel Clear Home without
clearing, press :.
Note: Clear Home is different from the ClrScreen programming
command found under the 8 I/O menu.
280 Chapter 14: Memory Management
You can execute Clear Home from either the Home screen or
the Program editor. If you select Clear Home from the Program
editor, it is inserted at the cursor location. The Home screen
and all entries are cleared when the program is executed.
Clear Home takes no additional arguments.
To clear the Home screen and all entries:
1. Press - l to display the Home screen.
2. Press - Ÿ 5 to paste the instruction to the Home
screen.
3. Press b to execute the instruction.
ClrAllLists - Ÿ 6
ClrAllLists sets to 0 the dimension of each list in memory. To
cancel ClrAllLists, press :. ClrAllLists does not delete list
names from memory, from the - v Ls menu, or from the
List editor.
You can execute ClrAllLists from either the Home screen or the
Program editor. If you select ClrAllLists from within the
Program editor, it is inserted at the cursor location. The lists
are cleared when the program is executed.
ClrAlllLists takes no additional arguments.
To clear all elements from all lists:
1. Press - l to display the Home screen.
2. Press - Ÿ 6 to paste the instruction to the Home
screen.
3. Press b to execute the instruction.
Reset - Ÿ 7
The RESET secondary menu gives you the options of resetting
all RAM memory (including default settings) or only resetting
the default settings while preserving other data stored in
memory, such as programs and Yn functions. To leave without
resetting and to return to the Home screen, press either
- l or :.
Chapter 14: Memory Management 281
Resetting All Memory - Ÿ 7 1
Resetting all RAM memory on the TIN73 restores the memory
to the factory settings. It deletes all non-system variables and
all programs. It resets all system variables to the default
settings.
Before you reset ALL memory, consider deleting only selected
data using - Ÿ 4:Delete.
- Ÿ 7
- Ÿ 7
1
From the RESET RAM screen:
•
•
Select 1:No to cancel memory reset and return to the
Home screen.
Select 2:Reset to erase from memory all data and
programs. All factory defaults are restored. Mem cleared is
displayed on the Home screen.
When you clear memory, the contrast sometimes changes. If
the screen is faded or blank, adjust the contrast. Press - $
to increase the contrast or - # to decrease the contrast.
282 Chapter 14: Memory Management
Resetting Defaults - Ÿ 7 2
When you reset defaults on the TIN73, all defaults are restored
to the factory settings. Stored data and programs are not
changed.
Some examples of the TIN73 defaults that are restored by
resetting the defaults are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mode settings (.).
Yn functions that are deselected (&).
WINDOW variables (').
Stat plots that are deselected (- e).
WINDOW format settings (- g).
rand seed value (1 PRB 1:rand).
- Ÿ 7
- Ÿ 7
2
From the RESET DEFAULTS screen:
•
•
Select 1:No to cancel defaults reset and return to the Home
screen.
Select 2:Reset to reset all defaults. Default settings are
restored. Defaults set is displayed on the Home screen.
Function and
Instruction Reference
A
All the operations in this section are included in the CATALOG
(- |). Non-alphabetic operations (such as +, !, and >) are
listed at the end of the CATALOG.
You always can use the CATALOG to select an operation and insert it
next to the cursor on the Home screen or to a command line in the
Program editor. You also can use the specific keystrokes, menus, or
screens listed here below the function or instruction’s name.
† Indicates menus or screens that insert the operation’s name only
if you are in the Program editor. In most cases (like mode or
window format settings), you can use these menus or screens from
the Home screen to perform the operation interactively; the name
is not inserted at the cursor.
‡ Indicates menus or screens that are valid only from the Program
editor’s main menu. From the Home screen, you cannot use these
menus or screens to select an operation.
[ ] Indicate optional arguments. If you specify an optional
argument, do not enter the brackets.
4
5
8
5
2
5
A§b/c
b
+
2
.
†
Selects the A§b/c Display Format mode setting.
Displays results as mixed numbers, if applicable.
1
10
3
8Ab/c/d/e
8
8
/
Ab/c d/e
b
b
3
3
?
10
3
1
3
/
Ab/c d/e
Converts a simple fraction to a mixed number or a
mixed number to a simple fraction.
3
284 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
abs(value)
M
abs( 35)
b
35
1NUM
Returns the absolute value of a real number,
expression, or each element of a list.
conditionA and conditionB
-t
PROGRAM:AND
Ü
:1 A
Ü
:2 B
Logic (boolean) operator; returns 1 if both conditionA
and conditionB are true (non-zero). Returns 0 if
either conditionA or conditionB is false (zero).
conditionA and conditionB can be real numbers,
expressions, or lists.
:A>0 and B<0
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
Test operations are frequently used in programs.
Ans
¦
1.7 4.2
b
7.14
-¢
b
147/ Ans
Returns the last answer calculated.
20.58823529
augment(list1,list2)
augment({1L, 3,2},{5,4})
b
{1 L3 2 5 4}
-vOPS
Combines the elements of two lists, list1 and list2, to
create a new list.
1
9
5
9
2
3
Autosimp
b
+
.
†
Selects the Autosimp Simplification mode setting.
Automatically simplifies fractional results.
AxesOff
AxesOn
-g
†
WINDOW format settings; turns off or on the graph
axes.
3
4
2
5
4
b/c
b
+
4
.
†
Selects the b/c Display Format mode setting. Displays
results as simple fractions, if applicable.
BarPlot
See Plot1: Bar Graph
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 285
BoxPlot
See Plot1: Box Plot
Circle(X,Y,radius)
b
ClrDraw
Done
2
b
Circle(0,0,7)
Draws a circle with center (X,Y) and radius, a real
number.
WINDOW values are
set with ZSquare.
Clear Home
-Ÿ
Clears the Home screen (like ClrScreen), and also
clears all entries stored in - £ and erases all
entries on the History screen.
ClrAllLists
-Ÿ
Sets the dimension of all lists in memory to 0.
ClrDraw
2
Clears all drawn elements from the graph screen.
ClrList list1[,list2,list3,...]
-vOPS
1 ¨
ClrList L , LIST
b
Clears all items in at least one specified list.
ClrScreen
8I/O
‡
Programming command; clears the Home screen
during program execution.
ClrTable
8I/O
-|
–or–
†
Clears the values in the table during program
execution if Indpnt:Ask is set.
coin(tosses)
b
coin(5)
{1 1 0 1 0}
1PRB
Returns a random list of 0s and 1s that represents
heads and tails for one or more coin tosses. tosses is a
positive whole number.
286 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
CoordOff
CoordOn
†-g
format settings; turns off or on cursor
WINDOW
coordinates so that they are not displayed at the bottom
of the graph.
cos(value)
-uTRIG
Returns the cosine of a real number, expression, or
each element of a list. Results are determined by
Angle mode setting ( or ).
In Degree mode:
cos(45)b
.7071067812
cos ({0,60,90})b
{1 .5 0}
Degree
Radian
In Radian mode:
cos(p/2) b
0
cos ({0,p/2,p}) b
{1 0 L1}
L
1
cos (value)
In Degree mode:
cos (1) b
0
-uTRIG
cos ({1,0}) b
Returns the arccosine of a real number, expression,
or each element of a list. M1
1. Results are
or
{0 90}
value
determined by Angle mode setting (
).
Radian
Degree
In Radian mode:
cos (.5) b
1.047197551
cos ({0,.5} )b
{1.570796327 1. ...}
Degree
†.
Selects the
In Degree mode:
sin(90)b
1
sin(pà2) b
.0274121336
Angle mode setting. Interprets
Degree
angles as degrees.
DelVar variable
†8CTL –or– -|
Deletes the contents of
PROGRAM:DELVAR
1
:{1,2}ÜL
1
:Disp L
from memory. You
variable
:Pause
cannot delete a program or a system variable.
1
:DelVar L
1
:Disp L
:Pause
ERROR 14: UNDEFINED
DependAsk
†-f
Selects the
format setting.
Depend: Ask TABLE SETUP
The user must highlight a dependent variable ( )
Y
to view
space with the cursor, and then press
the value.
b
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 287
DependAuto
†-f
Selects the
format setting.
Depend: Auto TABLE SETUP
Table automatically displays dependent variable ( )
Y
values.
DiagnosticOff
DiagnosticOn
-|
Settings which tell the calculator not to display
(
) or to display (
) r and r
and
DiagnosticOff
(coefficient of determination) with
DiagnosticOn
LinReg
regression model (
) results or
ExpReg
- v CALC
R for QuadReg regression model results.
[,
]
dice(rolls #dice )
dice(5)b
{5 1 3 6 2}
1PRB
dice(5,2)b
Returns a random list of numbers (between 1 and 6)
that represent dice rolls. takes one optional
{11 5 7 2 10}
dice(
a positive whole number>1. If
argument,
#dice,
#dice
is specified, each list element is the total sum of one
roll’s results.
dim(list)
newDimension#Xdim(list)
dimension#Xdim(newList)
1
{1,2,3}ÜL
b
{1 2 3}
3
1
dim(L ) b
-vOPS
1
5Üdim(L ) b
5
1
L
b
{1 2 3 0 0}
Returns the dimension (number of elements) of a
defined list, changes the dimension of an existing list,
or creates a new list with a specified number of
elements. New elements are set to 0.
4Üdim(¨NEW) b
4
¨NEW b
{0 0 0 0}
[
,
,ꢀ]
Disp valueA valueB
PROGRAM:DISP
:10ÜX
‡8I/O
:Disp X
Programming command (display); displays one or
more , as specified in an argument. To display
:Disp X +3X–6
:Pause
values
text, surround the
the output, follow
with quotation marks. To see
value
with a
instruction.
Pause
Disp
PROGRAM:DISPTEXT
:Disp "MATH IS FUN!"
:Pause
DispGraph
‡8I/O
Programming command (display graph); displays the
PROGRAM:GRAPH
:"2X+5"ÜY
:DispGraph
graph for all defined and selected n functions during
Y
program execution.
288 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
DispTable
PROGRAM:TABLE
:"2X+5"ÜY
‡8I/O
Programming command (display table); displays the
:IndpntAuto
:DependAuto
:DispTable
table for all defined and selected n functions during
Y
program execution.
angle8DMS
-uANGLE
In Degree or Radian mode:
50 DMS b
¡8
50 0'0"
¡
Converts an angle to DMS (degrees minutes'
¡
seconds") notation. Results are determined by the
In Radian mode:
50 DMS b
8
Angle mode setting (
or
).
Degree
Radian
2864 47'20.312"
¡
:
:
:
,
DS<(variable value)
(if answer
command1
command2
PROGRAM:DS
:9ÜA
)
| value
:Lbl S
:Disp A
‡8CTL
Programming command (decrement and skip if less
than); subtracts 1 from . If the answer is <
:DS<(A,5)
:Goto S
variable
is skipped; if the answer is
:Disp "A IS NOW <5"
:Pause
, then
, then
value
value
always executed.
command1
command1
|
is executed.
is
command2
e^(x)
e^(2.5)b
12.18249396
1LOG
Raises e to a power of , where is a real number, an
x
x
expression that results in an real number, or a list of
real numbers. e equals 2.71828182846.
value © exponent
In Normal Numeric mode:
12.3456789 © 5 b 1234567.89
(1.78/2.34)© 2 b
76.06837607
-{
Enters a number in scientific notation. The display of
the result depends upon the Numeric mode setting
or ). can be a real number or list.
{6.34,854.6}© 3 b
{6340 854600}
(
Normal
Sci value
Else
See
:
:
:
If Then Else End
End
‡8CTL
Programming command; you must include an
End
instruction at the end of each
loop. Also, you must enter an
, or
Repeat
instruction at the
For(, While
End
end of each
group.
group and each
If–Then–Else
If–Then
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 289
ExpReg [XList,YList,freq,Y ]
Ü
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L
3 b
Done
Done
Ü
4 b
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L
-vCALC
Set Decimal mode to 2.
Fits the equation (y=ab ) to XList and YList with
frequency list, freq, and stores the regression equation
to Y . XList, YList, and freq (if specified) must have
the same number of elements.
3
ExpReg L ,L ,Y
4
b
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Select ZStandard.
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.
ExprOff
ExprOn
-g
†
WINDOW format settings; turns off or on the
expression display in the top left corner while tracing
a graph.
8F/D
3
8 /
F
b
.
75
D
4
>
3
4
8 /
.75 F
b
Converts a fraction to its decimal equivalent or
changes a decimal to its fractional equivalent, if
possible.
D
Fill(number,list)
Ü
{3,4,5} L
1 b
{3 4 5}
Done
{8 8 8}
1
Fill(8,L )
b
-|
1 b
L
Replaces each element in existing list with specified
real number, number.
Fix #ofplaces
b
Fix 3
Done
3.142
p b
.
†
Sets fixed Decimal mode setting for # of decimal
places. #ofplaces must be an integer between 0 and 9.
It can be an expression which equals an appropriate
integer.
Float
b
Float
Done
p b
.
3.141592654
†
Selects the Float Decimal Notation mode setting.
Displays a decimal with a maximum of 10 digits,
including the sign and decimal point.
290 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
FnOff [1,2,3,4]
FnOn [1,2,3,4]
FnOff 1,3 b
FnOn 2 b
Done
Done
-}2:Y-Vars
Turns off (deselects) or on (selects) all Yn functions
or specified Yn functions (Y1, Y2, Y3, or Y4).
:For(variable,begin,end,[increment])
:block (while variable end)
:End
:command
PROGRAM:FOR
:For(A,0,8,2)
:Disp A2
:Pause
:End
‡8CTL
Programming command; executes commands in block
through end, increasing variable from begin by
increment until variable>end.
fPart(value)
1NUM
Returns the fractional part of a real number,
expression, or each element in a list.
fPart(23.45)b
fPart(L17.26¦8) b
fPart({1.2,3.4,5.6}) b
.45
L.08
{.2 .4 .6}
1
1
2
fPart(1 )
2
gcd(valueA,valueB)
1MATH
Returns the greatest common divisor (the largest
gcd(27,36) b
9
27
3
4
4Simp 9 b
36
number that can divide into the two values evenly), of
two positive whole numbers or lists of positive whole
numbers.
Get(variable)
PROGRAM:GETSOUND
:Send ({3,.00025,99,1,0,0,0,0,
†8I/O –or– -|
13})
:Get(L1)
:Get(L2)
Gets data from a CBR or CBL 2/CBL System and stores
it in variable.
GetCalc(variable)
PROGRAM:GETCALC
:GetCalc(L1)
:GetCalc(Y1)
†8I/O –or– -|
Gets contents of variable from another TIN73 and
stores it to variable on the receiving TIN73.
:GetCalc(Pic1)
getKey
PROGRAM:GETKEY
:Lbl A
‡8I/O
:0"K
Programming command; returns the key code for the
current keystroke. See Chapter 12: Programming for
the Key Code Diagram displayed with the GetKey
explanation.
:While K=0
:getKey"K
:End
:Disp K
:If Kƒ45
:Goto A
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 291
Goto label
8CTL
PROGRAM:GOTO
:Lbl 99
‡
:Input A
Programming command; transfers program control to
‚
:If A 100
the label specified by preceding label instruction.
:Stop
:Disp A
:Pause
:Goto 99
GraphStyle(Y ,type)
8CTL -|
PROGRAM:STYLE
Ü
:"2X+5" Y
†
–or–
:GraphStyle(1,4)
:ZStandard
Defines one of seven graphstyle types for Y . Y =1, 2,
n
3, or 4 (for Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4). The type icons described
below are located to the left of Yn in the Y= editor.
1 = » (line)
5 = À (path)
6 = Á (animate)
7 = Â (dot)
2 = ¼ (thick)
3 = ¾ (above)
4 = ¿ (below)
GridOff
GridOn
-g
†
WINDOW format settings; turn off or on grid lines that
correspond with Xscl and Yscl while graphing.
Histogram
See Plot1: Histogram
Horizontal y
b
Horiz 4.5
2DRAW
Draws a horizontal line on the current graph at Y=y. y
can be an expression but not a list.
:If condition
:command1 (if true)
:command2
PROGRAM:IF
Ü
:0 A
:Lbl Z
Ü
:A+1 A
8CTL
‡
:Disp "A IS",A
:Pause
Programming command; if condition is true
(non-zero), then command1 is executed. If condition
‚
:If A 2
is false (zero), then command1 is skipped.
:Stop
:Goto Z
292 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
If–Then
PROGRAM:THEN
:If condition
:Then
:block (if true)
:End
Ü
Ü
:1 X:10 Y
:If X<10
:Then
Ü
:2X+3 X
Ü
:2Y–3 Y
8CTL
‡
:End
Programming commands; if condition is true
:Disp (X,Y)
:Pause
(non-zero), then block is executed. If condition is
false (zero), then block is skipped.
If–Then–Else
:If condition
:Then
PROGRAM:ELSE
:Input "X=",X
:If X<0
:block1 (if true)
:Else
:Then
Ü
Y
:X
:block2 (if false)
:End
:Else
Ü
:X Y
:End
8CTL
‡
:Disp X,Y
:Pause
Programming commands; if condition is true
(non-zero), then block1 is executed. If condition is
false (zero), then block2 is executed.
IndpntAsk
-f
†
Selects the Indpnt: Ask TABLE SETUP format setting.
Table asks the user for independent variable (X)
values.
IndpntAuto
-f
†
Selects the Indpnt: Auto TABLE SETUP format setting.
Table automatically displays independent variable (X)
values.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 293
Input
Input [variable]
Input ["text",variable]
PROGRAM:INPUTVAR
:Input "Y =",Y
:Input "A=",A
¨
¨
8I/O
:Input " DATA=", DATA
:Disp "Y (A)=",Y (A)
:Pause
‡
Programming command; Input, with no arguments,
displays the current graph. Otherwise, Input accepts
input and stores it to variable (prompted by a ?,
unless otherwise defined). text designates a specific
text prompt (16 characters), if desired, and must be
enclosed in quotation marks.
:Disp
¨
:"Y ( DATA)=",Y ( DATA)
:Pause
¨
:PROGRAM:GRPHINPT
:FnOff
:PlotsOff
:ZStandard
:Input
:Line (0,0,8,8)
:Pause
int(value)
b
b
int (23.45)
23
-|
L
L24
int ( 23.45)
Returns the largest integer value, where value can be a
real number, expression, or list.
For a negative non-integer, int returns the integer that is
one less than the integer part of the number. To return
the exact integer part, use iPart instead.
à
posintegerA Int posintegerB
b
9 Intà 2
4r1
-Œ
Divides two positive integers and displays the
quotient and the remainder, r.
iPart(value)
b
iPart (23.45)
23
L
iPart ( 17.26 8)
iPart ({1.2,3.4,5.6})
¦
b
1NUM
L138
b
Returns the integer part of a real number, expression,
or each element of a list.
{1 3 5}
1
1
iPart(1 )
2
:IS>(variable,value)
:command1 (if answer is value)
:command2
:PROGRAM:IS
Ü
:0 A
:Lbl S
8CTL
:Disp A
:IS>(A,5)
:Goto S
‡
Programming command (increment and skip if
greater than); adds variable by 1. If the answer is >
value, then command1 is skipped; if the answer is
value, then command1 is executed. command2 is
always executed.
:Disp "A IS NOW >5"
:Pause
294 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
¨listname
ܨ
{1,2,3} ABC
b
{1 2 3}
{1 2 3}
¨
b
-vOPS
List signifier; precedes all user-created names when
displayed outside of the List editor.
LabelOff
LabelOn
-g
ABC
†
WINDOW format settings; turns off or on axes labels.
Lbl label
8CTL
PROGRAM:LBL
:Lbl 99
‡
:Input A
Programming command; gives a name (label) to a
particular location in a program. label can be one or
two text characters.
‚
:If A 100
:Stop
:Disp A
:Pause
:Goto 99
lcm(valueA,valueB)
b
lcm(10,6)
30
1MATH
Returns the least common multiple (the smallest
number that the two values can divide into evenly) of
two positive whole numbers or lists of positive whole
numbers.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
Line(X ,Y ,X ,Y [,0])
2DRAW
Draws a line from point (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).
Select ZStandard and return to
the Home screen.
b
Line(0,0,6,9)
Including the argument, 0, after the X and Y
coordinates erases a line from (X ,Y ) to (X ,Y ).
Return to the Home screen.
b
Line(2,3,4,6,0)
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 295
LinReg(ax+b) [XList,YList,freq,Y ]
-vCALC
Fits the linear equation (y=ax+b) to XList and YList
Decimal mode set to 2:
Ü
3 b
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L
Done
Done
Ü
4 b
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L
3
LinReg(ax+b) L,L ,Y
4
b
with frequency list, freq, and stores the regression
equation to Y . XList, YList, and freq (if specified)
must have the same number of elements.
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Select ZStandard.
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.
@List(list)
-vOPS
Returns a list of the differences between consecutive
elements in a list.
ln(value)
ln(list)
1LOG
Returns the natural logarithm of a positive real
Ü
{4.5,4.6,6,7.5} L
2 b
{4.5 4.6 6 7.5}
{.1 1.4 1.5}
.6931471806
2.495956486
@
2
List(L )
b
b
ln(2)
b
ln(36.4/3)
number, an expression that results in a positive real
number, or a list of positive real numbers.
log(value)
log(list)
b
log(2)
.3010299957
1.083980129
1LOG
b
log(36.4/3)
Returns the base 10 logarithm of a positive real
number, an expression (that results in a positive real
number), or a list of positive real numbers.
1 1
+
2
$
Mansimp
b
4 4
4
.
†
2
1
Fac=2
2
4
b
Simp
Selects the Mansimp Simplification mode setting.
Requires user to simplify fractional results manually
4
using the B key.
296 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
Manual-Fit [Y ]
Ü
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L
3 b
Done
Done
Ü
4 b
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L
-vCALC
Allows you to fit manually a line to plotted data. The
Set up Plot1 as a scatter plot
and graph using ZStat:
regression equation is stored to Y , if specified.
Return to the Home screen and
select Manual-Fit.
Select beginning and ending
points of line by moving the
cursor and then pressing b.
max(valueA,valueB)
1NUM
b
b
max(2.3,1.4)
2.3
6
-vMATH
– or –
max({1,3,6})
Returns the larger of two values or the largest
element in one list. value can be a real number,
expression or a list.
b
max({1,10},{2,9})
2 3
{2 10}
3
4
If both values are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one value is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
max( ,
3 4
)
mean(list[,freq])
-vMATH
Returns the mean (mathematical average) of list. If a
b
mean({1,2,3,4})
2.5
b
mean({1,2,3,4},{4,5,4,6})
2.631578947
second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq
must have the same number of elements.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 297
median(list[,freq])
-vMATH
Returns the median (the middle element) of list. If a
b
median({1,2,3,4})
2.5
2
b
median({1,2,6},{4,5,4})
second list, freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the
frequency of the elements in the first list. list and freq
must have the same number of elements.
Med-Med [XList,YList,freq,Y ]
Decimal mode set to 2:
Ü
3 b
4 b
b
-vCALC
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L
Done
Done
Ü
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L
Fits a median-median model equation, y=ax+b, to
XList and YList with frequency list, freq, and stores
the regression equation to Y . XList, YList, and freq
(if specified) must have the same number of elements.
3
Med-Med L ,L ,Y
4
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
(
6
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.
Menu("title","item1",label1[,"item2",label2ꢀ])
:PROGRAM:FRIENDS
8CTL
:Menu("FRIENDS","JULIE",A,
"XIAODAN",B,"LETICIA",C,
"ROBERTO",D,"DOUGLAS",E,
"ANSIK",F,"DETER",G)
‡
Programming command; generates a menu of up to
seven items during program execution. When you
select a menu item, the calculator branches to the
label corresponding with that item.
min(valueA,valueB)
min(list)
L
min(3, 5)
min( 5.2, L5.3)
b
L5
L5.3
4
L
b
b
1NUM
-vMATH
min(5,2+2)
– or –
min( (minimum) returns the smaller of two values or
the smallest element in one list. value can be a real
number, expression or a list.
2 3
2
3
min( ,
)
3 4
If both values are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one value is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
ModBoxPlot
See Plot1: Modified Box Plot
298 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
mode(list[,freq])
b
mode({1,2,4,3,1,8})
-vMATH
{1}
Returns the mode (element which occurs most
frequently) of list. If a second list, freq, is specified, it
is interpreted as the frequency of the elements in the
first list. list and freq must have the same number of
elements.
MultiConst
-†
†
Selects the Multiple mode (affects the Set Constant
editor). Allows the user to access all defined
constants (as opposed to only one).
items nCr number
b
5 nCr 2
10
1PRB
b
5 nCr {2,4,6,8}
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken
{10 5 0 0}
r number at a time. The order in which you select the
items DOES NOT matter. items and number can be
non-negative integers or lists.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element in the list, and list of combinations is
returned.
Normal
©M
2
b
123
1.23
.
†
Selects the Normal Decimal Notation mode setting;
Displays results with digits to the left and right of the
decimal (as opposed to scientific notation).
items nPr number
b
5 nPr 2
20
1PRB
b
{20 120 0 0}
5 nPr {2,4,6,8}
Returns the number of permutations of n items taken
r number at a time. The order in which you select the
items DOES matter. items and number can be
nonnegative integers or lists.
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element in the list, and list of permutations is
returned.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 299
conditionA or conditionB
-t
Logic (boolean) operator; returns 1 if either
PROGRAM:OR
Ü
:1 A
Ü
:2 B
:A>0 or B<0
conditionA or conditionB is true (non-zero). Returns
0 if both conditionA or conditionB are false (zero).
conditionA and conditionB can be real numbers,
expressions, or lists
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
Test operations are frequently used in programs.
Output(row,column,"text")
Output(row,column,value)
PROGRAM:OUTPUT
Ü
:3+5 B
8I/0
:ClrScreen
‡
:Output(5,4,"ANSWER")
:Output(5,12,B)
:Pause
Programming command; displays text or value at the
beginning of specified row and column. You must
surround text with quotation marks (- t).
Pause [value]
8CTL
PROGRAM:PAUSE
Ü
:10 X
‡
Ü
:"X+2" Y
:ZStandard
:Pause
Programming command; suspends program execution
until you press b or displays value and suspends
program execution until you press b.
PictoPlot
See Plot1: Pictograph
PiePlot
See Plot1: Pie Chart
Plot1(type,argument1,argument2,ꢀ)
Plot2(type,argument1,argument2,ꢀ)
Plot3(type,argument1,argument2,ꢀ)
-ePLOTS
†
Selects and defines Statistical Plot 1,2, or 3 ( Plot1,
Plot2, Plot3), according to one of eight stat plot types.
All types and corresponding arguments are listed
next. Select type from the - e TYPE menu.
(continued)
300 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
Scatter Plot Ô
xyLine Plot Ó
Ü
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L
1 b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
Plotn(Scatter,Xlist,Ylist[,mark])
Plotn(xyLine,Xlist,Ylist[,mark])
Ü
2 b
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
The optional mark (›, +, or ¦) specifies the character
used to plot the points. If omitted, default mark is
box. Access mark from 8 - e MARK or
- |.
PROGRAM:SCATTER
:PlotsOff
1
2
:Plot2(Scatter,L,L )
Pictograph Î
:ZStat
:Trace
Plotn(PictoPlot,CategList,DataList,scale,
orientation,typeIcon)
orientation=0 (vertical) or 1 (horizontal).
typeIcon choices: PersonIcon (Î); TreeIcon (Ç);
DollarIcon (È); FaceIcon (É); PieIcon (Ï); DiamondIcon
(Ë); StarIcon (Ì). Access typeIcons from
8 - e MARK or - |.
Bar Graph Ð
Plotn(BarPlot,CategList, orientation,
DataList1[,DataList2,DataList3])
orientation=0 (vertical) or 1 (horizontal). Specify
between 1 and 4 DataLists.
Pie Chart Ï
Ü
1 b
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L
Plotn(PiePlot,CategList,DataList,type)
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
type=0 (Number Pie Chart) or 1 (Percent Pie Chart).
Ü
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L
2 b
Histogram Ò
Box Plot Õ
Modified Box Plot Ö
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
PROGRAM:HISTOGRM
:PlotsOff
Plotn(Histogram,Xlist[,freq])
Plotn(BoxPlot,Xlist[,freq])
1
:Plot1(Histogram,L,L )
2
Plotn(ModBoxPlot,Xlist[,freq,mark])
:ZStat
:Trace
freq=1 (default) or a list name. The optional mark
(›;+;¦) specifies the character used to plot the points.
If omitted, default mark is box. Access mark from
8 - e MARK or - |.
PlotsOff [1,2,3]
PlotsOn [1,2,3]
b
PlotsOff 1,3
Done
-e
Turns off (deselects) or on (selects) all stat plots if no
arguments are specified, or turns off or on specified
stat plots using 1, 2, or 3, (for Plot1, Plot2, or Plot3).
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 301
prgmname
PROGRAM:VOLUME
:Input "DIAMETER=",D
:Input "HEIGHT=",H
‡8CTRL
Programming command; calls
as a
prgmname
:prgmAREA
:A¦HÜV
subroutine in an existing program.
program not yet created.
can be a
name
:Disp "VOLUME=",V
:Pause
PROGRAM:AREA
:D/2ÜR
:p¦R ÜA
:Return
[
ꢀ]
Prompt variableA ,variableB,
PROGRAM:PROMPT
:Prompt Xmin
:Prompt Xmax
:Prompt Ymin
‡8I/O
Programming command; displays specified
variable
followed by . During program execution, at each
=?
prompt, the user enters a value or expression for each
:Prompt Ymax
, and then presses
.
n functions are
variable
not valid with
b Y
The calculator adjustsWINDOW
variable values according to
user’s input.
.
Prompt
Pt-Change(X,Y)
Pt-Change(L6,2) b
2POINTS
Changes a point’s status (on or off) at ( , ).
X Y
[
[
]
]
Pt-Off(X,Y ,mark )
Pt-Off(3,5,2)b
Pt-On(X,Y ,mark )
Pt-On(3,5,2)b
2POINTS
Erases or draws a point at ( , ) using
X Y
(
1
= ¦;
mark,
= ›;
=
). If
is omitted, the default
is
2
3
+
mark
box. If you specified
mark
to turn on a point with
mark
, you must specify the same
when turning
mark
Pt-On(
it off.
,
Pxl-Change(row column)
PxlChange(10,75)b
2POINTS
Changes a pixel’s status (on or off) at (
,
row column
);
0 62, and 0 94.
row column
,
,
Pxl-Off(row column)
Pxl-Off(10,75)b
Pxl-On(row column)
Pxl-On(10,75)b
2POINTS
Erases or draws a pixel at (
,
row column
); 0 62,
row
and 0 94.
column
302 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
pxl-Test(row,column)
b
Pxl-On(10,75)
2POINTS
Returns 1 if pixel at (row, column) is on; returns 0 if it
Done
1
b
pxl-Test(10,75)
is off; 0row62, and 0column94.
QuadReg [XList,YList,freq,Y ]
-vCALC
Decimal mode set to 2:
Ü
3 b
4 b
b
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9} L
Done
Done
Ü
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9} L
Fits the second-degree polynomial (y=ax +bx+c) to
XList and YList with frequency list, freq, and stores
the regression equation to Y . XList, YList, and freq
(if specified) must have the same number of elements.
3
4
QuadReg L ,L ,Y
freq is the frequency of occurrence for each
corresponding data point in XList. If freq is omitted,
all values are used once.
Select ZStandard.
Defaults for XList and YList are L1 and L2.
Radian
In Radian mode:
b
.
sin(90)
.8939966636
1
†
b
sin(pà2)
Sets the Radian Angle mode setting. Interprets angles
as radians.
rand
seed Xrand
Ü
0 rand
b
0
.9435974025
.908318861
b
rand
rand
b
1PRB
Generates a random number between 0 and 1. By
storing an integer seed value (default=0) to rand, you
can control a random number sequence.
Ü
1 rand
b
1
.7455607728
.8559005971
b
rand
rand
b
randInt(lower,upper[,#ofIntegers])
(Results may vary.)
1PRB
b
randInt(1,10)
3
Generates a random integer between lower and upper
(both integers) boundaries. To generate more than
one random integer, specify #ofIntegers, a positive
whole number>0.
b
randInt(1,10,3)
{3 5 7}
RecallPic number
b
Line(0,0,6,6)
b
2STO
StorePic 2
Done
Displays the current graph and superimposes
Picnumber on it. number can be 1 (Pic1), 2 (Pic2), or
3 (Pic3).
b
RecallPic 2
(Pic2 displayed)
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 303
remainder(dividend,divisor)
b
remainder(10,4)
2
remainder(list,divisor)
remainder(dividend,list)
remainder(list,list)
Ü
{5,5,5,5,5} L
1 b
{5 5 5 5 5}
{1 2 3 4 5}
1NUM
Ü
2 b
{1,2,3,4,5} L
Returns the remainder resulting from the division of
two positive whole numbers, dividend and divisor,
each of which can be a list.
1
remainder(L,L )
2
b
{0 1 2 1 0}
If both arguments are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
:Repeat condition
:block
:End
:command
PROGRAM:REPEAT
Ü
:0 I:0 J
Ü
‚
:Repeat I 6
Ü
Ü
: I+1 I:J+1 J
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
8CTL
‡
Programming command; executes block until
condition is true.
Return
8CTL
:End
PROGRAM:AREA
Ü
:D/2 R
p¦ Ü
A
‡
:
R
Programming command; returns to the calling
program.
:Return
PROGRAM:RETURN
:Input "DIAMETER=",D
:Input "HEIGHT=",H
:prgmAREA
¦
:A H V
Ü
:Disp "VOLUME=",V
round(value[,#decimal_places])
1NUM
In Float mode:
p
round( ,4)
b
3.1416
Returns a number, expression, or each element in a
list rounded to 10 digits or #decimal_places ( 9), if
p
round( )
b
3.141592654
specified.
Scatter
See Plot1: Scatter Plot
Sci
b
©
123
1.23
2
.
†
Selects the Sci Numeric Notation mode setting.
Displays results in scientific notation.
304 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
Select(XList,YList)
{1,3,4,5,5,7,8,9}ÜL3 b Done
{1,4,2,3,4,6,7,9}ÜL4 b Done
-vOPS
Select L5,L6 b
Selects one or more specific data points from a
Scatter or xyLine stat plot, and updates the lists in
memory as specified by XList and YList.
Select bounds by moving " and !,
and then pressing b.
X values for selected points are stored in L5;
Y values for selected points are stored in L6.
Send(variable)
‡8I/O
Programming command; sends contents of variable
PROGRAM:SEND
:{1,2,3,4,5}ÜL1
:Send(L1)
to the CBL 2/CBL System.
seq(expression,variable,begin,end [,increment])
-vOPS
seq(X2,X,1,8,2) b
{1 9 25 49}
Returns a list that fulfills the requirements of the five
arguments, which you specify. increment is 1 if not
specified.
SetConst(expression,Cn)
PROGRAM:SETCONST
:MultiConst
†-† –or– -|
:SetConst(+2,1)
:SetConst(N4,2)
:SetConst(¦2+3,3)
:SetConst(+3¦2,4)
Programming command equivalent of the Set Constant
editor. expression defines the constant to be recalled,
and Cn is 1, 2, 3, or 4 (for C1, C2, C3, or C4).
prgmSETCONST b Done
All constants are
defined in the Set
Constant editor.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 305
SetMenu("title","item1",variable1[,"item2",variable2ꢀ])
8CTL
PROGRAM:SETMENU
:SetMenu("MATHGRADES",
"TEST1",A,"TEST2",B,"TEST3",
C,"TEST4",D,"TEST5",E
‡
Sets up a menu with title (1characters16) and of up
to seven items (1characters10). During program
execution, the user inputs (and edits, as necessary)
numerical values, called variables, to each item.
SetUpEditor [list1,list2,list3ꢀ]
Ü
{1,2,3,4} L
1 b
{1 2 3 4}
{5 6 7 8}
Ü
2 b
{5,6,7,8} L
-|
1
SetUpEditor L,L
2 b
Done
Removes all list names from the List editor, and then
sets it up to display lists in the specified order,
starting with column 1. If no lists are specified, the
calculator sets up L1-L6 in order and includes one blank
list to the right of L6.
3
Press
to view List editor.
Shade(lower,upper[,left,right,pattern,res])
Shade(XN2,X N8X,L5,1,2,3)
b
2DRAW
Draws both functions, lower and upper, shading
above lower and below upper. You can limit shading
by defining up to four optional arguments. Specify left
and right X boundaries, pattern, which can equal 1-4
(descriptions shown below), and res, which equals
1-8 (1=highest resolution; 8=lowest resolution).
b
ClrDrw
Done
Pattern:
Shade(XN8X,XN2)
b
1 = vertical (default)
2 = horizontal
3 = diagonal upper left to lower right
4 = diagonal lower left to upper right
4
Simp [simplification_factor]
In Mansimp mode:
24
4Simp
B
12
b
Fac=2$
In Mansimp Simplification mode, Simp simplifies a
fraction by its lowest common factor (default) or by
simplification_factor.
36
18
24
36
2
3
b
4Simp 12
sin(value)
In Degree mode:
b
-uTRIG
sin(30)
.5
b
sin({0,30,90})
Returns the sine of a real number, expression, or each
{0 .5 1}
element of a list. Results are determined by the Angle
mode setting (Degree or Radian).
In Radian mode:
b
sin(p/2)
1
b
sin({0,p/2,p})
{0 1 0}
306 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
sinL1(value)
In Degree mode:
b
-uTRIG
Returns the arcsine of a real number, expression, or
sin (1)
90
b
sin ({1,.5,0))
{90 30 60}
each element of a list. M1value 1. Results are
determined by the Angle mode setting (Degree or
Radian).
In Radian mode:
b
sin (1)
sin ({1,.5,0))
{.5235987756 0 1.570796327}
1.570796327
b
SingleConst
-†
†
Selects the Single mode (affects the Set Constant
editor). Allows the user to access only one defined
constant at a time.
SortA(list)
Ü
{5,8,M4,0, M6} L
1 b
SortA(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2,ꢀ)
{5 8 M4 0 M6}
1) b
SortA (L
-vOPS
Done
1 b
L
{M6 M4 0 5 8}
Sorts list elements from lowest to highest value
(ascending order) and categorical lists alphabetically.
Ü
2 b
{"E","A","Z"} L
When using dependent lists, dependlist, the calculator
sorts indpndtlist first, and then sorts all dependlists
by placing their elements in the same order as their
corresponding elements in the independent list.
{"E" "A" " Z"}
Done
2) b
SortA (L
2 b
L
{"A" "E" "Z"}
SortD(list)
Ü
{5,8,L4,0d,L6} L
1 b
SortD(indpntlist,dependlist1,dependlist2,ꢀ)
{5 8 L4 0 L6}
Done
1) b
SortD (L
-vOPS
1 b
L
{8 5 0 L4 L6}
Sorts list elements from highest to lowest value
(descending order) and categorical lists in reverse
alphabetical order.
Ü
{"E","A","Z"} L
2 b
{"E" "A" " Z"}
Done
When using dependent lists, dependlist, the calculator
sorts indpndtlist first, and then sorts all dependlists
by placing their elements in the same order as their
corresponding elements in the independent list.
2) b
SortD(L
2 b
L
{"Z" "E" "A"}
stdDev(list[,freq,type])
Ü
1 b
{1,2,8,10,11,21} L
-vMATH
{1 2 8 10 11 21}
Returns the standard deviation of list. If a second list,
freq, is specified, it is interpreted as the frequency of
the elements in the first list. list and freq must have
the same number of elements.
1
stdDev(L )
b
7.250287351
type=0 (population standard deviation) or 1 (sample
population deviation). If type is not specified, the
calculator returns sample population deviation.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 307
Stop
‡8CTL
PROGRAM:STOP
:Input "T=",T
:If T‚20
Programming command; ends program execution and
returns to Home screen.
:Then
:Disp "T‚20"
:Pause
:Else
:Stop
StorePic number
Line(0,0,6,6)b
StorePic 2b
Done
2STO
Stores the current graph display in one of three
picture variables. is , or (for variable
,
number 1 2
3
).
Pic1, Pic2, or Pic3
[,start,end])
sum(list
-vMATH
Returns the sum of all elements in
sum({1,2,4,8})b
sum({1,2,4,8},2,4)b
sum({1,2,4,8},3)b
15
14
12
. Specify the
list
additional optional arguments to return the sum of the
range of elements between and
.
end
start
tan(value)
-uTRIG
In Degree mode:
tan(0)b
0
tan({0,1,30})b
Returns the tangent of a real number, expression, or
all elements in a list. Results are determined by the
{0 .0174550649 .5773502692}
Angle mode setting (
or
).
Radian
Degree
In Radian mode:
tan(p/4) b
1
tan({p/2,p/4,0}) b
{1 0 0}
tanL1(value)
-uTRIG
In Degree mode:
tan (1) b
45
tan ({.5,1,0))b
Returns the arctangent of a real number, expression,
or each element in a list.
{26.56505118 45 0}
Since tan=sinàcos, tan is undefined when cos=0.
In Radian mode:
tan (.5) b
.463647609
Results are determined by the Angle mode setting
tan ({.5,1,0))b
(
or
).
Radian
Degree
{.463647609 .7853981634 0}
308 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
Text(row,column,["]text["])
Select AxesOff.
¦
Text(15,45,"2+3 4")
b
2DRAW
Draws text (functions, variables, or text instructions)
on the Graph screen when a graph is displayed.
0 row 57, and 0 column 94.
If text is surrounded by quotation marks, the text
characters are displayed. If the quotation marks are
omitted, the TIN73 calculates and displays the result
(up to 10 characters).
Return to the Home screen
b
ClrDraw
Done
¦
Text(15,45,2+3 4)
b
Then
See If-Then-End
Trace
PROGRAM:TRACE
Ü
:"X " Y
)
†
:DispGraph
:Trace
Selects the ) mode when displaying a graph.
1-Var Stats [XList,freq]
Ü
{1,2,3} L
2 b
{1 2 3}
{3 2 1}
ܨ
{3,2,1} FREQ
b
-vCALC
2,¨
1-Var Stats L FREQ
b
Analyzes and returns data for one list, XList, with one
measured variable (X). The frequency list, freq, is the
frequency of occurrence for each corresponding data
point in XList. Default XList is L1.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 309
2-Var Stats [XList,YList,freq]
Ü
{1,2,3} L
2 b
{1 2 3}
{4 5 6}
{2 4 2}
b
Ü
3 b
{4,5,6} L
-vCALC
ܨ
{2,4,2} FREQ
b
Analyzes and returns data for two lists, XList and
YList, with two measured variables, X, the
2, 3,¨
2-Var Stats L L FREQ
independent variable, and Y, the dependent variable.
The frequency list, freq, is the frequency of
occurrence for each corresponding data point in
XList and YList. Defaults for XList and YList are L1
and L2.
Vertical x
b
Vertical 4.5
2DRAW
Draws a vertical line on the current graph at X=x. x
can be an expression but not a list.
:While condition
:block (while condition is true)
:End
PROGRAM:WHILE
Ü
:0 I:0 J
Ü
:While I<6
:command
Ü
Ü
:I+1 I:J+1 J
:Disp "J=",J
:Pause
8CTL
‡
Programming command; tests condition before
:End
commands in loop are executed. While block of
commands WHILE condition is true.
xyLine
See Plot1: xyLine Plot
310 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
ZBox
DefineY =Xsin(X).
(ZOOM
Displays a graph, lets you (interactively) draw a box
Set the following WINDOW
values:
M
M
Xmin= 1000, Ymin= 1000,
Xmax=1000, Ymax=1000,
Xscl=90, Yscl=90
that defines a new viewing WINDOW, and then updates
the WINDOW.
GraphY .
Select ZBox.
Move the cursor, and press
b to select upper left and bottom
right corners of the box.
Selected portion (the box) is
automatically displayed.
ZDecimal
(ZOOM
Adjusts the viewing WINDOW so that @X=0.1 and
Define Y=X, graph using
ZStandard, and trace the graph
@Y=0.1, and displays the graph screen with the origin
centered on the screen.
X and Y values
increment by .212466.
Select ZDecimal and trace the
graph.
X and Y values now
increment by .1.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 311
ZInteger
Define Y =X, graph using
(ZOOM
ZStandard, and trace the graph
Lets you select a new center point, and then sets
@X=1, @Y=1, Xscl=10,Yscl=10. Replots the graph
immediately.
Select ZInteger, choose a new
center point, and trace the
graph.
Move the cursor, and press
b to select new center point.
X and Y values now
increment by 1.
Zoom In
(ZOOM
Lets you select a new center point, if desired, and then
DefineY =X and graph using
ZStandard.
magnifies the part of the graph that surrounds the
cursor location.
Select Zoom In. Move the
cursor to the upper right
section of the graph. Press
b
to select a new center
point and magnify the upper
right side of the graphed
function.
312 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
Zoom Out
DefineY =Xcos(X) and graph
using ZStandard.
(ZOOM
Displays a greater portion of the graph, centered on
Set the following WINDOW
values:
the cursor location. Move the cursor keys, and press
b to select new center point.
M
M
Xmin= 1000, Ymin= 1000,
Xmax=1000, Ymax=1000,
Xscl=90, Yscl=90
Zoom Out from the origin.
Select Zoom Out, and then press
b (since cursor automatically
starts from the origin).
ZoomFit
(ZOOM
Recalculates Ymin and Ymax to include the minimum
N
DefineY =X 20 graph using
using standard WINDOW value
(
(
6).
and maximum y values, between Xmin and Xmax, of
the selected functions and replots the functions.
Adjust the graph with ZoomFit.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 313
ZoomStat
Ü
1 b
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L
(ZOOM
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
Redefines the viewing WINDOW so that all statistical
data points are displayed.
Ü
{1,2,3,4,5,6} L
2 b
{1 2 3 4 5 6}
ZoomStat also selects an appropriate scale, if one
exists, for a Pictograph plot.
Graph and trace a Scatter stat
1
plot using L and L (
2
- e
)
and ZoomStat.
ZPrevious
(MEMORY
Replots the graph using the WINDOW variable values
of the graph that was displayed before you executed
the last ZOOM instruction.
ZQuadrant1
(ZOOM
Replots the graph using WINDOW variable values for
Define Y =X
(
using ZStandard (
6).
Quadrant I (Xmin=0, Xmax=9.4, Xscl=1, Ymin=0,
Ymax=9.4, Yscl=1).
Select ZQuadrant1.
ZSquare
(ZOOM
Adjusts the X or Y WINDOW settings so that each pixel
Select ZStandard. Return to the
Home screen.
b
Circle(0,0,7)
represents an equal width and height in the
coordinate system and updates the viewing WINDOW.
Circle is oval shaped
instead of perfectly round.
Continued
(
)
314 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
Select ZSquare. Return to the
Home screen.
Or, press - £ b.
Circle(0,0,7) b
ZStandard
Define Y =X
Select ZStandard.
(ZOOM
Replots the functions immediately, setting the
variables to the default values (
WINDOW
,
,
Xmin=M10 Xmax=10
,
,
,
).
Xscl=1 Ymin=M10 Ymax=10 Yscl=1
ZTrig
Define Y =sin(X) (&).
Select ZTrig.
(ZOOM
Replots the functions immediately, updating the
variables that are often appropriate for
WINDOW
graphing trig functions.
value!
5! b
120
1PRB
Returns the factorial of
.
value value
can be an integer
or list of integers between 0 and 69.
angle¡
-uANGLE
Designates
In Radian mode:
50¡ b
.872664626
50¡4DMS b
50¡0'0"
as degrees, regardless of the current
angle
Angle mode setting or DMS notation.
In Degree mode:
50¡ b
50
50¡4DMS b
50¡0'0"
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 315
r
angle
In Radian mode:
b
-uANGLE
50
50
4
50 DMS
b
Specifies an angle as radians, regardless of the
current Angle mode setting.
¡
2864 47'20.312"
2864.788976
In Degree mode:
b
50
4
50 DMS
b
¡
2864 47'20.312"
x
x
‡value
‡
b
4
2
256
4
8
2
1MATH
Calculates the x root of value, which is equivalent to
n where n =value. value can be a real number,
expression, or list.
3
n
b
1MATH
Calculates the cube of n, which is equivalent to
Q
Q
n
n
n of any real number, expression, or each
element in a list.
‡(value)
1MATH
Calculates the cube root of value, which is equivalent
3
‡
b
(8)
to n where n =value. value can be a real number,
expression, or list.
real_number%
In Float mode:
M
b
M
C
30.6%
.306
¦
20 % 30
b
6
Changes real_number to percent. Results display
according to the Decimal mode setting.
conditionA = conditionB (equal)
conditionA ƒ conditionB (not equal)
conditionA < conditionB (less than)
conditionA > conditionB (greater than)
conditionA conditionB (less than or equal to)
conditionA ‚ conditionA (greater than or equal to)
In Degree mode:
b
sin(30)=cos(60)
1
1
0
1
1
1
ƒ
sin(30) cos(90)
b
b
b
b
b
sin(30)<cos(90)
sin(30)>cos(90)
sin(30) cos(60)
‚
sin(30) cos(90)
-t
Relational operators; return 1 if the conditional
statement is true. Return 0 if the conditional
statement is false. conditionA and conditionB can be
real numbers, expressions, or lists.
If both conditions are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one condition is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is compared with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
316 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
›
+
¦
See Plot1: xyLine, Scatter, and Modified Box Plot: mark
PersonIcon (Î)
TreeIcon (Ç)
DollarIcon (È)
FaceIcon (É)
PieIcon (Ï)
DiamondIcon (Ë)
StarIcon (Ì)
See Plot1: Pictograph: typeIcons
value-1
In b/c mode:
-ƒ
Returns the inverse, x , of value, which is the
2
3
3
2
M
1
b
1
equivalent of its reciprocal, / , of a real number,
x
expression, or each element in a list.
value2
Ü
{1,2,3} L
1 b
{1 2 3}
{1 4 9}
1
L
b
6
Finds the square of value. value can be a real number,
expression, or list.
value^power
b
4^4
256
7
Raises value to any power. value and power can be
real numbers, expressions, or lists. power is limited
by mathematical rules.
M
M
M
b
M
M
14-68
82
16
16
b
b
a
(4 )
M
( 4 )
Negates a number, expression, or each element in a
list. Note: This is different from the subtraction key
(T).
M
b
M
{ 1
M
2
M
3}
{1,2,3}
10^(x)
10^(list)
b
b
10^(4)
1000
©M
M
10^( 4)
1
4
b
10^({1,2,3})
1
LOG
{10 100 1000
Raises 10 to the power of x, where x is an integer or a
M ‚
list of integers. If x 4 and 10 , then the result is
displayed in scientific notation.
Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference 317
‡(value)
‡
b
(16)
4
-z
Calculates the square root of value, which can be a
positive real number, an expression that results in a
positive real number, or a list of positive numbers.
valueA¦valueB
Ü
1 b
{1,4,8} L
{1 4 8}
valueAàvalueB
valueA+valueB
valueANvalueB
¦
4 L
1 b
{4 16 32}
à
{2,4,8} {2,2,2}
b
{1 2 4}
MF\T
M N
456 123
b
M
579
Returns the product (I), quotient (F), sum (\) or
difference (T) of valueA and valueB, which can be
real numbers, expressions, or lists.
In Autosimp mode:
2
3
3
4
1
2
¦
b
If both values are lists, they must have the same
number of elements. If one argument is a list and the
other a non-list, the non-list is paired with each
element of the list, and a list is returned.
§
In A b/c mode:
1
1
4
b
4 +
2
2
{
Ü
{"A","B","C"} L
3
-t
{"A" "B" "C"}
Signifies the beginning of a list.
(
b
4(3)
12
D
P
(4+4)6 8
b
b
6
7
Designates a 1st priority calculation or implies
multiplication.
P
4+4(6 8)
}
)
Ü
{"A","B","C"} L
3
-t
Signifies the end of a list.
{"A" "B" "C"}
b
4(3)
12
E
P
(4+4)6 8
b
b
6
7
Designates a 1st priority calculation, implies
multiplication, or completes functions and
instructions.
P
4+4(6 8)
b
log(10)
{"A","B","C"} L
1
,
'
Ü
3
¡
{"A" "B" "C"}
Separates list elements when entering them outside of
the List editor, and separates function/programming
command arguments.
b
Circle(0,0,7)
In Radian mode:
¡
50 0'0"
b
-uANGLE
.872664626
Specifies the minutes in DMS angle notation.
318 Appendix A: Function and Instruction Reference
"
Ü
3 b
{"A","B","C"} L
-t
{"A" "B" "C"}
-uANGLE
PROGRAM:TEXT
:AxesOff
Surrounds categorical list elements and list formulas
that are attached to a list name. Surrounds text
displayed on the Graph display using the Text(
command (from the Home screen or in a Program).
:Text(15,45,"TEXT")
:DispGraph
PROGRAM:FUNCTION
In a programming command, they surround text to be
displayed with Disp, text which designates an Input
prompt, and functions that are assigned to a Yn
variable.
Ü
:"2X+5" Y1
:ZStandard
PROGRAM:INPUT
Specifies seconds in DMS angle notation.
¨
:Input "NEW LIST=", NEW
¨
:Disp " NEW=", NEW
¨
:Pause
In Radian mode:
¡
50 0'0"
b
.872664626
:
PROGRAM:GREETING
-|
:Disp "HI, TERESA":Pause
Precedes all programming commands (automatically
displayed by the calculator in the Program editor).
Separates two programming commands listed on one
line or two entries on the Home screen.
p
In Float mode:
p b
-„
2
6.283185307
p
Represents the value for the constant, , in
p
calculations. The calculator uses =3.1415926535898.
?
PROGRAM:QUESTION
:Disp "WHAT TIME IS IT?"
:Pause
-|
Displays a question mark, which acts like a text
character.
Reference
B
Information
The TIN73 Menu Map......................................................... 320
The VARS Menu - } ............................................... 329
Equation Operating System (EOS é) ................................ 330
In Case of Difficulty............................................................ 331
Correcting an Error ............................................................ 332
Error Messages ................................................................... 332
320 Appendix B: Reference Information
The TIN73 Menu Map
The TIN73 menu map begins at the top-left corner of the
keyboard and follows the keyboard layout from left to right.
Default values and settings are shown.
&
Plot1 Plot2 Plot3
çY1=
çY2=
çY3=
çY4=
- e
- e (in Program editor)
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
STAT PLOTS
1:Plot1…Off
Ô L1 L2 ›
2:Plot2…Off
Ô L1 L2 ›
3:Plot3…Off
Ô L1 L2 ›
4:PlotsOff
PLOTS
TYPE
MARK
1:Plot1(
1:Scatter
2:xyLine
1:›
2:Plot2(
2:+
3:Plot3(
3:PictoPlot
4:BarPlot
5:PiePlot
6:Histogram
7:BoxPlot
8:ModBoxPlot
3:¦
4:PlotsOff
5:PlotsOn
4:PersonIcon
5:TreeIcon
6:DollarIcon
7:FaceIcon
8:PieIcon
9:DiamondIcon
0:StarIcon
5:PlotsOn
'
WINDOW
Xmin=-10
Xmax=10
@X=.2127659574…
Xscl=1
Ymin=-10
Ymax=10
Yscl=1
Appendix B: Reference Information 321
- f
- f (in Program editor)
TABLE SETUP
TblStart=0
TABLE SETUP
Indpnt:Auto Ask
Depend:Auto Ask
@Tbl=1
Indpnt:Auto Ask
Depend:Auto Ask
(
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
MEMORY
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
ZOOM
1:ZBox
1:ZPrevious
2:SetFactors…
2:Zoom In
3:Zoom Out
4:ZQuadrant1
5:ZSquare
6:ZStandard
7:ZoomStat
8:ZDecimal
9:ZoomFit
0:ZInteger
A:ZTrig
ZOOM FACTORS
XFact=4
YFact=4
- g
.
CoordOn CoordOff
GridOff GridOn
AxesOn AxesOff
LabelOff LabelOn
ExprOn ExprOff
Normal Sci
Float 0123456789
Degree Radian
A§b/c b/c
Autosimp Mansimp
322 Appendix B: Reference Information
1
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
MATH
1:lcm(
2:gcd(
NUM
PRB
LOG
1:abs(
1:rand
2:randInt(
3:nPr
1:log(
2:10^(
3:ln(
2:round(
3:iPart(
4:fPart(
5:min(
3
3:
3
4: ‡(
4:nCr
5:!
4:e^(
x
5: ‡
6:Solver…
6:max(
6:coin(
7:dice(
7:remainder(
2
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
- u
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
TRIG
1:sin(
DRAW
POINTS
1:Pt-On(
2:Pt-Off(
STO
ANGLE
1:¡
1:ClrDraw
2:Line(
1:StorePic
2:RecallPic
2:sin 1(
3:cos(
4:cos 1(
5:tan(
2:'
3:Horizontal 3:Pt-Change(
3:"
4:Vertical
5:Shade(
6:Circle(
7:Text(
4:Pxl-On(
4:r
6:tan 1(
5:Pxl-Off(
5:8DMS
6:Pxl-Change(
7:pxl-Test(
8:Pen
- v
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
Ls
OPS
MATH
CALC
1:L1
1:SortA(
2:SortD(
3:ClrList
4:dim(
1:min(
1:1-Var Stats
2:2-Var Stats
3:Manual-Fit
4:Med-Med
5:LinReg(ax+b)
6:QuadReg
7:ExpReg
2:L2
2:max(
3:L3
3:mean(
4:median(
5:mode(
6:stdDev(
7:sum(
4:L4
5:L5
5:@List(
6:Select(
7:seq(
6:L6
7:name1
8:name2
…
8:augment(
9:¨
Appendix B: Reference Information 323
8
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
EXEC
EDIT
NEW
1:Create New
1:name1
1:name1
2:name2
2:name2
…
…
8 (in Program editor)
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
CTL
I/O
EXEC
1:If
1:Input
1:name1
2:name2
…
2:Then
3:Else
2:Prompt
3:Disp
4:For(
4:DispGraph
5:DispTable
6:Output(
7:getKey
8:ClrScreen
9:ClrTable
0:GetCalc(
A:Get(
5:While
6:Repeat
7:End
8:Pause
9:Lbl
0:Goto
A:IS>(
B:DS<(
C:Menu(
D:SetMenu(
E:prgm
F:Return
G:Stop
H:DelVar
I:GraphStyle(
B:Send(
324 Appendix B: Reference Information
- |
CATALOG
A§b/c
4Abàc/dàe
abs(
…
sin(
L
sin 1(
SingleConst
SortA(
…
p
?
9
APPLICATIONS
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:Link
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
2:CBLàCBR
SEND
RECEIVE
1:Receive
1:GAUGE
2:DATA LOGGER
3:CBR
1:All+…
2:AllN…
3:Prgm…
4:QUIT
4:List…
5:Pic…
6:Real…
7:Y-Vars…
8:Consts…
9:Vars to TI82…
0:Vars to TI83…
A:Apps…
B.AppVars…
C:SendId
D:Back Up…
Appendix B: Reference Information 325
- }
VARS
1:Window…
2:Y-Vars…
3:Statistics…
4:Picture…
5:Table…
6:Factor
- } 1:Window
- } 2:Y-Vars
WINDOW
1:Xmin
2:Xmax
3:Xscl
FUNCTION
1:Y1
2:Y2
3:Y3
4:Ymin
5:Ymax
6:Yscl
4:Y4
5:FnOn
6:FnOff
7:Xres
8:@X
9:@Y
0:XFact
A:YFact
- } 3:Statistics
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
XY
G
EQ
PTS
1:x1
2:y1
3:x2
4:y2
5:x3
6:y3
7:Q1
8:Med
9:Q3
1:n
1:Gx
2:Gx2
3:Gy
4:Gy2
5:Gxy
1:RegEQ
2:a
2:v
3:Sx
4:sx
3:b
4:c
5:w
5:r
6:r2
7:R2
6:Sy
7:sy
8:minX
9:maxX
0:minY
A:maxY
326 Appendix B: Reference Information
- } 4:Picture
- } 5:Table
1:Pic1 (Empty)
2:Pic2 (Empty)
3:Pic3 (Empty)
TABLE
1:TblStart
2:@Tbl
- ‚
CONVERSIONS
1:Length…
2:Area…
3:Volume…
4:Time…
5:Temp…
6:MassàWeight…
7:Speed…
- ‚
1:Length
- ‚
2:Area
- ‚
3:Volume
LENGTH
1:mm
2:cm
AREA
1:ft2
2:m2
VOLUME
1:liter
2:gal
3:m
3:mi2
4:km2
5:acre
6:in2
7:cm2
8:yd2
9:ha
3:qt
4:inch
5:ft
4:pt
5:oz
6:yard
7:km
6:cm3
7:in3
8:ft3
8:mile
9:m3
0:galUK
A:ozUK
- ‚
5:Temp
- ‚
6:MassàWeight…
- ‚
7:Speed…
TEMP
MASSàWT.
1:g
SPEED
1:ft/s
1:degC
2:degF
3:degK
2:kg
2:m/s
3:lb
3:mi/hr
4:km/hr
5:knot
4:ton
5:mton
Appendix B: Reference Information 327
- †
- † (in Program editor)
Set Constant:
SET CONSTANTS
1:SetConst(
Single Multiple
C1=
C2=
C3=
C4=
2:SingleConst
3:MultiConst
- Ÿ
MEMORY
1:About
2:Check RAM…
3:Check APPs…
4:Delete…
5:Clear Home
6:ClrAllLists
7:Reset…
- Ÿ 2:Check RAM
- Ÿ 3:Check APPs
MEM FREE 25002
SPACES FREE 3
Real
15
54
32
32
15
0
CBLàCBR
1
List
Y-Vars
Consts
Prgm
Pic
328 Appendix B: Reference Information
- ‚ 4:Delete
DELETE FROM…
1:All…
2:Real…
3:List…
4:Y-Vars…
5:Consts…
6:Prgm…
7:Pic…
8:Apps…
9:AppVars…
- ‚ 7:Reset
RESET
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:All RAM
RESET RAM
2:Defaults
RESET DEFAULTS
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
1:No
2:Reset
1:No
2:Reset
Resetting RAM
erases all data
and programs.
Appendix B: Reference Information 329
The VARS Menu - }
Access system variables through the VARS menu (- }).
You can enter the names of functions and system variables in
an expression or store values to them directly. For more
information about storing values to a variable, see Chapter 1:
Operating the TIN73.
All VARS menu items, except 6:Factor, display secondary menus.
For specific information about the individual menu items, see
their respective chapter in this manual. When you select a
variable from a menu, it is inserted at the cursor location.
- }
1:Window
2:Y-Vars
Accesses WINDOW screen (') variables
(Chapter 9: Function Graphing).
Accesses Y= editor (&) variables (Chapter
9: Function Graphing).
3:Statistics
Accesses 1-Var Stats and 2-Var Stats
(- v CALC) variables (Chapter 7:
Statistical Analyses).
4:Picture
5:Table
Accesses picture (2 STO) variables
(Chapter 10: Draw).
Accesses TABLE SETUP (- f)
variables (Chapter 8: Tables).
6:Factor
Returns the simplification factor of a
fraction after you simplify it using B
(Chapter 3: Fractions).
330 Appendix B: Reference Information
Equation Operating System (EOS é)
The Equation Operating System (EOS) defines the order in
which functions and expressions are entered and evaluated on
the TIN73. Within a priority level, EOS evaluates functions from
left to right and in the following order.
1
2
Calculations within parentheses.
Single-argument functions that precede the argument,
such as ‡(, sin(, or log(.
Multi-argument functions, such as min(2,3), are
evaluated as they are encountered.
3
Functions that are entered after the argument, such as !,
¡, r, and conversions.
4
Powers and roots, such as 25 or 5‡32.
Permutations (nPr) and combinations (nCr).
Multiplication, implied multiplication, and division.
Addition and subtraction.
5
6
7
8
Relational functions, such as > or {.
Logic operator and.
9
10
Logic operator or.
Appendix B: Reference Information 331
In Case of Difficulty
If
Suggested Action
You cannot see
anything on the
display.
Press - $ to darken or - # to lighten
the display contrast.
The LOW BATTERY
Replace the batteries as described in
message is displayed Appendix C: BatteryàService and Warranty
on the Home screen. Information.
A checkerboard
cursor (Ø) is
displayed.
Either you have entered the maximum
number of characters in a prompt or
memory is full. If memory is full, press
- Ÿ 4:Delete, and then delete some
items from memory (See Chapter 13:
Memory Management).
The busy indicator
A calculation, graph, or program has been
( © ) is displayed in the paused; the TIN73 is waiting for input. Press
top right corner.
b to continue, or press ^ to break.
An error message is
displayed.
Refer to the section in this chapter entitled
“Error Messages.” Press b to clear.
The TIN73 does not
Press - l as many times as needed to
appear to be working exit any menu and to return to the Home
properly.
screen.
– or –
Be sure that the batteries are installed
properly and that they are fresh.
The difficulty
persists.
Refer to Appendix C: BatteryàService and
Warranty Information for information on
how to contact Customer Support to
discuss the problem or to obtain service.
332 Appendix B: Reference Information
Correcting an Error
When the TIN73 detects an error, it returns an error message as
a menu title, such as ERR:SYNTAX or ERR:DIM MISMATCH.
To correct an error, follow these steps:
1. Note the error type (ERR:error type).
2. Select 2:Goto, if it is available. The previous screen is
displayed with the cursor at or near the error location.
3. If you select 1:Quit (or press - l or :), the
Home screen is displayed.
4. Determine the cause of the error. If you cannot recognize
the error, use the Error Messages table below which
describes error messages in detail.
5. Correct the expression.
If a syntax error occurs in the contents of a Yn function
during program execution, selecting 2:Goto returns you to
the Y= editor, not to the program.
Error Messages
When the TIN73 detects an error, it displays ERR:TYPE and an
error menu. This table contains each error type, possible
causes, and suggestions for correction.
The TIN73 detects errors while performing the following tasks:
•
•
•
•
Evaluating an expression
Executing an instruction
Plotting a graph or stat plot
Storing a value
Appendix B: Reference Information 333
Error Type
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
ARGUMENT
A function or instruction does not have the correct
number of arguments. See Appendix A and the
appropriate chapter.
BAD GUESS
You specified a guess in the Equation Solver that is
not between the lower and upper bounds.
Your guess and several points around it are
undefined.
Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has
a solution, change the bounds and/or initial guess.
BOUND
BREAK
With Select(, you defined Left Bound>Right Bound.
In the Equation Solver, you entered lower‚upper.
You pressed the ^ key to break execution of a
program, to halt a DRAW instruction, or to stop
evaluation of an expression.
DATA TYPE
You entered a value or variable that is the wrong
data type.
•
For a function (including implied
multiplication) or an instruction, you entered
an argument that is an invalid data type, such
as a real number where a list is required.
•
•
In an editor, you entered a type that is not
allowed.
You attempted to store to an incorrect data
type, such as a real number to a list.
DIM MISMATCH You attempted to perform an operation that
references more than one list, but the lists do not
have the same dimension (number of elements).
334 Appendix B: Reference Information
Error Type
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
DIVIDE BY 0
You attempted to divide by 0. This error is not
returned during graphing. The TIN73 allows for
undefined values on a graph.
You attempted a linear regression with a vertical
line.
DOMAIN
You specified an argument to a function or
instruction outside the valid range, such as using a
negative frequency in box plots. This error is not
returned during graphing because the TIN73 allows
for undefined values on a graph. See Chapter 6:
Statistical Plots or Chapter 9: Function Graphing.
In a Pictograph, an element in Data List is too large
so that the maximum scale (99999) can’t make all
icons fit in one screen.
You attempted an exponential regression with a MY.
Duplicate Name A variable you attempted to transmit cannot be
transmitted because a variable with that name
already exists in the receiving unit.
Error in Xmit
The TIN73 was unable to transmit an item. Check to
see that the cable is firmly connected to both units
and that the receiving unit is in receive mode.
You pressed ^ to break during transmission.
You attempted to perform a backup from a TI-83 to a
TIN73.
You attempted to transfer data (other than L1-L6)
from a TIN73 to a TI-83 without using the Lists to TI83
command.
You attempted to use Get( with another calculator.
Appendix B: Reference Information 335
Error Type
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
ILLEGAL NEST You attempted to use an invalid function in an
argument to a function, such as seq( within
expression for seq(.
Can occur when combinations of nesting of function
evaluation exceeds five levels.
INCREMENT
INVALID
The increment in seq( is 0 or has the wrong sign. This
error is not returned during graphing. The TIN73
allows for undefined values on a graph.
The increment in a For( loop is 0.
You attempted to reference a variable or use a
function where it is not valid. For example, Yn
cannot reference Y, Xmin, @X, or TblStart.
Defining and graphing a Yn equation using the
variable Ans.
You attempted to use Select( without having selected
(turned on) at least one xyLine or Scatter plot.
INVALID DIM
ITERATIONS
You specified dimensions for an argument that are
not appropriate for the operation.
You specified a list dimension as something other
than an integer between 1 and 999.
The Equation Solver has exceeded the maximum
number of permitted iterations.
Examine a graph of the function. If the equation has
a solution, change the bounds, the initial guess, or
both.
LABEL
The label in the Goto instruction is not defined with a
Lbl instruction in the program.
336 Appendix B: Reference Information
Error Type
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
MEMORY
Memory is insufficient to perform the instruction or
function. You must delete items from memory
(Chapter 13: Memory Management) before executing
the instruction or function.
Recursive problems return this error; for example,
graphing the equation Y1=Y1.
Branching out of an If/Then, For(, While, or Repeat
loop with a Goto also can return this error because
the End statement that terminates the loop is never
reached.
MemoryFull
You are unable to transmit an item because the
receiving unit’s available memory is insufficient. You
may skip the item or exit receive mode.
During a memory backup, the receiving unit’s
available memory is insufficient to receive all items
in the sending unit’s memory. A message indicates
the number of bytes that the sending unit must
delete to do the memory backup. Delete items and
try again.
MODE
You attempt to simplify a fraction with B while in
Autosimp Simplification mode.
NO SIGN
CHANGE
The Equation Solver did not detect a sign change.
OVERFLOW
You attempted to enter, or you have calculated, a
number that is beyond the range of the calculator.
This error is not returned during graphing. The TIN73
allows for undefined values on a graph.
RESERVED
SCALE
You attempted to use a system variable
inappropriately. See Chapter 1: Operating the TIN73.
The Pictograph scale is invalid. Scale must be an
integer between 1 and 99,999.
Appendix B: Reference Information 337
Error Type
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
SINGULARITY
expression in the Equation Solver contains a
singularity (a point at which the function is not
defined). Examine a graph of the function. If the
equation has a solution, change the bounds or the
initial guess or both.
STAT
You attempted a stat calculation with lists that are
not appropriate.
•
•
•
•
Statistical analyses must have at least two data
points.
Med-Med must have at least three data points in
each partition.
When you use a frequency list, its elements
must be ‚0.
(Xmax-Xmin)/Xscl must be 47 for a Histogram.
STAT PLOT
SYNTAX
You attempted to display a graph when a stat plot
that uses an undefined list is turned on.
The command contains a syntax error. Look for
misplaced functions, arguments, parentheses, or
commas. See the appropriate chapter.
UNDEFINED
You referenced a variable that is not currently
defined. For example, you referenced a stat variable
when there is no current calculation because a list
has been edited, or you referenced a variable when
the variable is not valid for the current calculation,
such as c after Med-Med.
VALIDATION
Electrical interference caused a link to fail or this
calculator is not authorized to run the application.
338 Appendix B: Reference Information
Error Type
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies
A problem exists with the WINDOW variables.
WINDOW
RANGE
•
•
You defined XmaxXmin or YmaxYmin.
WINDOW variables are too small or too large to
graph correctly. You may have attempted to
zoom in or zoom out to a point that exceeds the
TIN73’s numerical range.
ZOOM
A point or a line, instead of a box, is defined in ZBox.
A ZOOM operation returned a math error.
Batteryà
Service and
Warranty
C
Information
Battery Information.........................................................339
When to Replace Batteries........................................339
Effects of Replacing the Batteries.............................340
Replacing the Batteries.............................................341
Battery Precautions...................................................341
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and Service ....................342
Australia & New Zealand Customers only.......................343
All Other Customers ........................................................344
Battery Information
The TIN73 uses four AAA alkaline batteries and has a user-
replaceable backup lithium battery (CR1616 or CR1620).
When to Replace Batteries
When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the
TIN73 displays the following message when you turn on the
unit.
340 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
Battery Information
The TIN73 uses four AAA alkaline batteries and has a user-
replaceable backup lithium battery (CR1616 or CR1620).
When to Replace Batteries
When the battery voltage level drops below a usable level, the
TIN73 displays the following message when you turn on the
unit.
Generally, the calculator continues to operate for one week
after the low-battery message is first displayed. After this
period, the TIN73 will turn off automatically and the unit will
not operate. Batteries must be replaced. All memory is
retained.
Note: The operating period following the first low-battery
message could be longer if you use the calculator infrequently
or shorter if you use the calculator frequently.
Replace the lithium battery every three to four years.
The calculator does not let you install new software or
application programming if the batteries are too low.
Effects of Replacing the Batteries
Do not remove both types of batteries (AAA and lithium
auxiliary) at the same time. Do not allow the batteries to lose
power completely. If you follow these guidelines and the steps
for replacing batteries on the next page, then you can replace
either type of battery without losing any information in
memory.
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 341
Replacing the Batteries
1. Turn off the calculator. Replace the slide cover over the
keyboard to avoid inadvertently turning on the calculator.
Turn the back of the calculator toward you.
2. Hold the calculator upright, push downward on the latch
on the top of the battery cover with your finger, and then
pull the cover toward you.
Note: To avoid loss of information stored in memory, you
must turn off the calculator. Do not remove the AAA
batteries and the lithium battery simultaneously.
3. Replace all four AAA alkaline batteries simultaneously.
Or, replace the lithium battery.
•
•
To replace the AAA alkaline batteries, remove all
four discharged AAA batteries and install new ones
according to the polarity (+ and -) diagram in the
battery compartment.
To replace the lithium battery, remove the screw
from the lithium-battery cover, and then remove the
cover. Install the new battery, + side up. Replace the
cover and secure it with the screw. Use a CR1616 or
CR1620 (or equivalent) lithium battery.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover. Turn the
calculator on and adjust the display contrast (- $ or
- #), as necessary.
Battery Precautions
Take these precautions when replacing batteries:
•
Do not mix new and used batteries. Do not mix brands or
type within brands of batteries.
•
•
•
Do not mix rechargeable and non-rechargeable batteries.
Install batteries according to polarity (+ and -) diagrams.
Do not place non-rechargeable batteries in a battery
recharger.
•
Do not incinerate batteries.
342 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
Texas Instruments (TI) Support and
Service
For General Information
Home Page:
education.ti.com
KnowledgeBase and
E-mail Inquiries:
education.ti.com/support
Phone:
1.800.TI.CARES (1.800.842. 2737)
For U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto
Rico, and Virgin Islands only
International
Information:
education.ti.com/support
(Click the International
Information link.)
For Technical Support
KnowledgeBase and
Support by E-mail:
education.ti.com/support
1.972.917.8324
Phone (not toll-free):
For Product (hardware) Service
Customers in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Puerto Rico
and Virgin Islands: Always contact TI Customer Support
before returning a product for service.
All other customers: Refer to the leaflet enclosed with this
product (hardware) or contact your local TI
retailer/distributor.
Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information 343
Customers in the U.S. and Canada Only
One-Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic
Product
This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to the
original purchaser and user of the product.
Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted
to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from the original
purchase date.
Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is warranted
against defective materials and construction. THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF
THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN DAMAGED BY ACCIDENT OR
UNREASONABLE USE, NEGLECT, IMPROPER SERVICE, OR OTHER
CAUSES NOT ARISING OUT OF DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR
CONSTRUCTION.
Warranty Disclaimers. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARISING OUT OF
THIS SALE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE ABOVE
ONE-YEAR PERIOD. TEXAS INSTRUMENTS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL COSTS, EXPENSES, OR DAMAGES INCURRED BY
THE CONSUMER OR ANY OTHER USER.
Some states/provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied
warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions
may not apply to you.
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights that vary from state to state or province to province.
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty period,
your defective product will be either repaired or replaced with a
reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI’s option) when the product
is returned, postage prepaid, to Texas Instruments Service Facility. The
warranty of the repaired or replacement unit will continue for the warranty of
the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer. Other than the postage
requirement, no charge will be made for such repair and/or replacement. TI
strongly recommends that you insure the product for value prior to mailing.
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not warrant
that the software will be free from errors or meet your specific requirements.
All software is provided “AS IS.”
Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this product
are protected by copyright.
344 Appendix C: Service and Warranty Information
Australia & New Zealand Customers only
One-Year Limited Warranty for Commercial Electronic
Product
This Texas Instruments electronic product warranty extends only to
the original purchaser and user of the product.
Warranty Duration. This Texas Instruments electronic product is
warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year from
the original purchase date.
Warranty Coverage. This Texas Instruments electronic product is
warranted against defective materials and construction. This
warranty is void if the product has been damaged by accident or
unreasonable use, neglect, improper service, or other causes not
arising out of defects in materials or construction.
Warranty Disclaimers. Any implied warranties arising out of
this sale, including but not limited to the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are
limited in duration to the above one-year period. Texas
Instruments shall not be liable for loss of use of the product
or other incidental or consequential costs, expenses, or
damages incurred by the consumer or any other user.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied
warranties or consequential damages, so the above limitations or
exclusions may not apply to you.
Legal Remedies. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and
you may also have other rights that vary from jurisdiction to
jurisdiction.
Warranty Performance. During the above one (1) year warranty
period, your defective product will be either repaired or replaced
with a new or reconditioned model of an equivalent quality (at TI’s
option) when the product is returned to the original point of
purchase. The repaired or replacement unit will continue for the
warranty of the original unit or six (6) months, whichever is longer.
Other than your cost to return the product, no charge will be made
for such repair and/or replacement. TI strongly recommends that you
insure the product for value if you mail it.
Software. Software is licensed, not sold. TI and its licensors do not
warrant that the software will be free from errors or meet your
specific requirements. All software is provided “AS IS.”
Copyright. The software and any documentation supplied with this
product are protected by copyright.
All Customers outside the U.S. and Canada
For information about the length and terms of the warranty, refer to your
package and/or to the warranty statement enclosed with this product, or
contact your local Texas Instruments retailer/distributor.
345 Index
Index
! (factorial), 52
" (seconds), 216
¡ (degrees), 216
¨ (list signifier), 101
‚ (relational operator), 32
x (statistical result variable),
136
@List(, 97
#SAMPLES
DATA LOGGER, 270
@Tbl
definition, 153
storing to, 161
@X, 171, 179
Gx, 136
Gx2, 136
Gxy, 136
–A– (continued)
angles
converting to DMS, 220
in DMS notation, 218
Ans (Last Answer), 18
continuing expressions, 18
3
applications
memory, 277
Apps, 279
AppVars, 279
Gy, 136
Gy2, 136
' (minutes), 216
< (relational operator), 32
= (relational operator), 32
> (relational operator), 32
0123456789 Decimal Notation
mode, 24
arctangent, 211
Area (units), 68
argument, 12
augment(, 100
Autosimp mode setting, 61
Axesoff, 172
stat plots, 114
AxesOn, 172
1 2 3 (Bar graph), 113, 118
10^( (10 to the power of), 55
1-Var Stats, 134
results, 136
2-Var Stats, 134
results, 136
3
( (cube), 37
b/c Display Format mode, 60
Back Up (SEND), 256
Bar (GAUGE), 267
Bar graph, 118
base 10 logarithm, 54
batteries, installing, 3
Boolean operators, 32
bound, 41
–A–
a (slope), 140, 142
A§b/c Display Format mode, 60
About (Memory Menu), 276
abs( (absolute value), 44
addition, 27
All- (SEND), 256
All+ (SEND), 256
analyses, statistical, 128, 133
and (Boolean operator), 33
ANGLE (- u) menu, 215
Angle mode
branching
DS>(, 235
IS>(, 235
LblàGoto, 234
trig functions, 211
346 Index
–C–
–C– (continued)
constants (continued)
Single mode, 72
contrast, display, 4
CONVERSIONS
cable, unit-to-unit. See unit-to-
unit cable
CALC (- v) menu, 133
CATALOG, 14
CategList, 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
categorical lists, 81
signifier, c, 85
fractions, 64, 65
units, 70
CBL 2/CBL, 247, 254
CBL/CBR App
steps for running, 264
CBR, 247, 254
CoordOff, 172
CoordOn, 172
CBR (data collection method),
266
characters, editing, 11
Check APPs, 277
Check RAM, 277
Circle(
from Graph screen, 195
from Home screen, 196
circumference, 195
Clear Home, 279
ClrAllLists, 90, 280
ClrDraw, 189
correlation coefficient (r), 136
ExpReg, 146
LinReg(ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
counter, constant, 73
Create New (program), 224
CTL (8) Menu, 227
ClrList, 95
ClrScreen, 247
ClrTable, 247
coefficient of determination
(r2), 136
Full, 10
ExpReg, 146
LinReg (ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
Insert, 10
–D–
coin(, 53
colon (:), 16
column
data collection methods, 265,
266
pixel, 205, 206
table, 152
Text(, 198
combinations (nCr), 51
commands, programming. See
programming commands
Constant Memory, 3
constants, 71
Data List, 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
DATA LOGGER, 266
counter, 73
defining, 72, 75
Multiple mode, 75
recalling, 73, 75
options, 270
Decimal Notation mode, 24
decimals
converting to fractions, 64
Index 347
–D– (continued)
defaults, resetting, 282
–D– (continued)
degrees
DMS, 216
trig, 211
Delete (Memory Menu), 278
DelVar, 240
denominator, 58
Depend (tables)
Ask, 156
points, 202
text, 197
Auto, 155, 156, 157
definition, 153
DuplicateName menu, 259
DependAsk, 161
DependAuto, 161
dependent list formula, 83
deleting, 91
dependent numerical lists, 83
dependent variable (Y), 150
DiagnosticOff
ExpReg, 146
LinReg(ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
DiagnosticOn
ExpReg, 146
LinReg(ax+b), 142
QuadReg, 144
dice(, 53
difference (subtraction), 27
difficulties, correcting, 331
dim( (dimension), 95
DIRECTNS
e^( (e to the power of), 56
edit keys, 11
editing
characters, 11
programs, 225
deleting, 89
displaying, 103
editing, 89
DATA LOGGER, 271
GAUGE, 268
Disp, 244
fractional, 82
numerical, 81
DispGraph, 245
display contrast, 4
Display Format mode, 60
DispTable, 245
dividend
remainder(, 48
division, 27
integer, 28
divisor
remainder(, 48, 50
DMS, 220
converting to, 220
notation, 218
drawing
editing, 159
End, 233
DATA LOGGER, 271
For, 231
If–Then, 229
If–Then–Else, 230
Repeat, 232
While, 232
entries, Home screen, 5
Clear Home, 279
Entry (Last Entry), 17
multiple expressions, 16
circles, 195
horizontal lines, 191
348 Index
–E– (continued)
Entry line
–F– (continued)
lists, 79
tables, 154, 160
Text editor, 8
Simplification mode, 60
simplifying manually, 62
Equation Operating System
(EOS), 15, 330
Equation Solver, 38
bound, 41
Solve, 41
error messages, 332
transmission, 260
errors, correcting, 332
EXEC (8) Menu
calling a subroutine, 250
executing a program, 251
ExpReg (exponential
regression), 146
Histogram, 121
stat plots, 113
with regressions, 133, 137
graph styles, 169
steps for, 164
expressions, 15
multiple on one line, 16
ExprOff, 172
ExprOn, 172
tracing, 178
WINDOW values, 171, 173
–F–
functions
Factor, simplification, 63
recalling, 64
factorial (!), 52
Float Decimal Notation mode,
24
For(, 231
format, window, 171
formula, dependent list, 83
attaching, 83
defining, 167
definition of, 12
editing, 168
deleting, 91
fPart (fractional part), 46
fractions
GAUGE, 266
comments, 268
converting mixed to simple,
65
converting to decimals, 64
Display Format mode, 60
entering, 58
gcd( (greatest common
divisor), 36
Get(, 247
factor, simplification, 63
recalling, 64
list elements, as, 82
mixed numbers, 58
negating, 59
results in calculations, 59
simple, 58
simplification factor, 62
GetCalc(, 247
getKey, 246
Goto, 234
Graph Explorer Software, 262
graph styles, 169
graphing
trig functions, 214
Index 349
–G– (continued)
–I– (continued)
graphing, function. See function
graphing
GraphStyle(, 240
greatest common divisor
(GCD), 36
–L–
L1-L6, 79, 80
LabelOff, 172
LabelOn, 172
GridOff, 172
Last Entry (Entry), 17
latitude (DMS), 218
Lbl (Label), 234
lcm( (least common multiple),
¨DIST
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
least common multiple (LCM),
35
letter keys, 8
GridOn, 172
–H–
Histogram, 121
Home screen, 5
Hor (stat plot option), 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Horizontal (draw)
from Graph screen, 191
from Home screen, 192
–I–
Light probe, 265
Line(
from Graph screen, 189
from Home screen, 190
to CBLàCBR, 255
LINK SEND menu, 254
LinReg(ax+b), 142
list braces { }, 8
IàO (8) Menu, 241
icons
graphstyle, 169
pictograph, 113, 117
Type (stat plots), 111
ID number, 262
IDList, 279
If, 229
If–Then, 229
If–Then–Else, 230
independent numerical lists, 83
independent variable (X), 150,
167
Indpnt (tables)
Ask, 157
Auto, 155, 156, 157
definition, 153
editing elements, 89
inserting elements, 89
inserting lists, 87
list signifier (¨), 91, 101
list, elements. See elements, list
lists
IndpntAsk, 161
IndpntAuto, 161
Input, 242
instructions, 12
integer division, 28
integer part (iPart), 46
interquartile range, 124
INTRVL (SEC)
DATA LOGGER, 271
inverse function, 29
inverse trig functions, 211
iPart (integer part), 46
¨ (list signifier), 91, 101
braces, 102
clearing elements, 90
ClrAllLists, 280
combining two, 100
copying, 103
350 Index
–L– (continued)
lists (continued)
creating, 102
–L– (continued)
¨VCMT, 269
¨VOLT
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
deleting elements, 89
deleting from memory, 88
dependent numerical, 83
editing elements, 89
entering elements, 81
formula, deleting, 91
formula, dependent list, 83
frequency. See frequency
lists
independent numerical, 83
inserting elements, 89
L1-L6, 79, 80
¨DCMT, 269
¨DIST, 269, 272
List editor, 79
list name notation, 80
¨LCMT, 269
¨LIGHT, 269, 272
¨TCMT, 269
¨TEMP, 269, 272
¨VCMT, 269
¨VOLT, 269, 272
math functions, with, 105
names, accessing, 91
naming, 79
–M–
Mansimp mode setting, 62
Manual-Fit, 138
max(
- v MATH Menu, 128
maxX, 136
maxY, 136
mean(, 130
median(, 130
Med-Med (median-median),
140
Memory Full menu, 259
MEMORYBACKUP menu, 261
Menu Map, 320
Menu(, 236
notation, 79
numerical elements, 81
sorting, 93
stat plot data, 109
steps for creating, 78
text elements, 81, 85
transferring (LINK), 254
Xlist, 114, 124
Ylist, 114
¨LCMT, 269
¨LIGHT
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
displaying, 12
exiting, 13
scrolling items, 13
secondary, 13
ln( (natural log), 55
LOG (1) Menu, 54
log( (base 10 logarithm), 54
logic (Boolean) operators, 32
longitude (DMS), 218
¨TCMT, 269
Meter (GAUGE), 267
MIN (GAUGE), 268
min(
- v MATH Menu, 128
1 NUM Menu, 47
¨TEMP
DATA LOGGER, 272
GAUGE, 269
Index 351
–M– (continued)
–O–
minutes
conversions, 69
DMS, 218
off/on, 3
minX, 136
minY, 136
mixed numbers, 58
converting to fractions, 65
mode settings
124
Output(, 245
0123456789, 24
A§b/c, 60
Autosimp, 61
b/c, 60
definition, 22
Degree, 211
Float, 24
list element display, 81
Mansimp, 62
Multiple (constants), 75
Normal, 23
Radian, 211
parentheses
implied multiplication, 16
Pause, 233
percent, 29
Percent (Pie chart), 113, 120
pi, 28
Pic (SEND), 256
Sci, 23
Single (constants), 72
table element display, 154
mode(, 130
Modified Box plot, 124
Multiple mode (constants), 75
multiplication, 27
pixel, 205
–N–
n (number of data points), 136
naming
lists, 79
DATA LOGGER, 271
Plot1, 2, and 3, 109
PlotsOff/On, 110
131
programs, 224
natural log (ln), 55
nCr (combinations), 51
negative numbers, 6
NEW (8) Menu, 224
Normal mode setting, 23
nPr (permutations), 51
NUM (1) Menu, 44
Number (Pie chart), 113, 120
numbers
entering, 6
negative, 6
numerator, 58
Numeric Notation mode, 23
numerical lists, 81
dependent, 83
Prgm (SEND), 256
primary function, 6
Probe-Time Graph, 270
product (multiplication), 27
Program editor, 225
exiting, 227
with 8 CTL Menu, 227
programming commands
ClrScreen, 247
ClrTable, 247
deleting, 249
independent, 83
352 Index
–P– (continued)
–P– (continued)
Prompt, 244
Programming Commands
(continued)
DelVar, 240
Disp, 244
DispGraph, 245
DispTable, 245
DS>(, 235
editing, 248
End, 233
entering, 226
For(, 231
Get(, 247
GetCalc(, 247
getKey, 246
Goto, 234
from Graph screen, 202
from Graph screen, 202
Pxl-Change(, 205
Pxl-Off(, 205
GraphStyle(, 240
If, 229
Pxl-On(, 205
pxl-Test(, 206
If–Then, 229
If–Then–Else, 230
Input, 242
inserting, 249
IS>(, 235
Lbl (Label), 234
Menu(, 236
Output(, 245
Pause, 233
prgm, 238
Prompt, 244
Repeat, 232
Return, 239
Return with subroutines,
251
–Q–
Q1 (1st quartile median point)
Modified Box plot, 124
Q3 (statistical result variable),
QuadReg (quadratic
QuickZoom, 179
Send(, 247
SetMenu(, 237
Stop, 239
While, 232
programs
–R–
branching, 234
calling, 250
r. See correlation coefficient
r (radians), 216
r2àR2. See coefficient of
determination
copying, 249
creating new, 224
debugging, 252
definition, 223
editing, 225
entering commands, 226
executing, 251
naming, 224
radians
DMS, 216
trig, 211
radius, circle, 196
renaming, 249
steps for creating, 223
Index 353
–R– (continued)
RAM memory, 254
back up, 261, 263
resetting, 281
rand (random number), 49
randInt( (random integer), 50
RANGER program, 265, 273
Rcl (Recall), 21
–S– (continued)
menu items, 13
secondary (-) functions, 7
secondary menus, 13
seconds
with programs, 250
Real (SEND), 256
RealTme
DATA LOGGER, 271
RecallPic, 208
Receive (LINK), 257
RECEIVE (9) menu, 257
reciprocal, 29
RegEQ (Regression Equation),
137
regression
exponential (ExpReg), 146
linear (LinReg(ax+b)), 142
quadratic (QuadReg), 144
regression models, 133
relational operators, 32
remainder
49
Select(, 98
CATALOG, 14
SEND menu, 255
Send(, 247
SendID (SEND), 256
seq(, 99
SetFactors, 186
SetMenu(, 237
Shade(, 193
integer division, 28
remainder(, 48
Rename (LINK), 259
Repeat, 232
Reset
Simplification mode, 60
simplification signifier ($), 62
sin( (sine), 210
Single mode (constants), 72
slope (a), 140, 142
Smart Graph, 178
software
All RAM, 281
Defaults, 282
Reset (MEMORY Menu), 280
Return, 239
subroutines, 251
right triangle, 210
round, 44
upgrade, 262
Solve (Equation Solver), 41
Sonic probe, 265
SortD( (descending), 93
sorting lists, 93
row
pixel, 206
Text(, 198
multiple, 94
–S–
space (in text), 8
Spaces Free screen, 277
Speed (units), 69
square, 30
sample standard deviation, 131,
136
Scale (pictograph), 113, 117
Scatter plot, 114
Select(, 98
square root, 31
standard deviation
population, 131
sample, 131
Sci mode setting, 23
scientific notation, 7
354 Index
–S– (continued)
–T– (continued)
stat plots
adjusting viewing window,
114
Bar graph, 118
defining plots, 109
deselecting Yn functions, 109
displaying, 114
drawing on, 188
editors, 111
steps for creating, 151
TABLE SETUP screen, 153
tan( (tangent), 210
Histogram, 121
list data, 109
main menu, 109
Modified Box plot, 124
options, defining, 112
Pictograph, 117
Pie chart, 120
Temp probe, 265
Temperature (units), 69
Text editor, 7
Plot1, 109
Plot2, 109
Plot3, 109
PlotsOff, 110
categorical list elements, 81
naming a program, 224
PlotsOn, 110
TI Connect, 254
Time (units), 69
tracing a graph, 178
controlling increments, 179
transmission errors (LINK), 260
trig calculations, 212
trig functions, 210
Scatter plot, 114
steps for defining, 108
tracing, 114
types, selecting, 111
xyLine plot, 114
statistical analyses, 128, 133
stdDev(. See standard
deviation
Stop, 239
store (variables), 20
STORE (2) menu, 206
StorePic, 207
subroutines, 238, 250
subtraction, 27
sum (addition), 27
sum(, 132
Angle mode, 211
TRIG (- u) menu, 210
summary points, 136
Sx (statistical result variable),
136
–U–
units
angle, 215
Area, 68
Sy (statistical result variable),
136
converting, 70
DATA LOGGER, 271
GAUGE, 268
Length, 68
MassàWeight, 69
Speed, 69
system variables, 20, 329
–T–
TABLE SETUP screen, 153
tables
defining functions, 152
definition, 150
Temperature, 69
Time, 69
Index 355
–U– (continued)
units (continued)
Volume, 69
–X– (continued)
Xscl, 171
unit-to-unit cable, 254
upgrade software, 262
installing, 262
xth root, 38
Select(, 98
where to find, 262
–Y–
–V–
Y= editor, 167
variables
recalling, 21
VARS Menu, 329
y=ax+b, 142
Manual-Fit, 138
Med-Med, 140
y=ax2+bx+c, 144
Y1, 167
Y3, 167
variables, types of, 20
VARS (- }) Menu, 329
Vars to TI82 (SEND), 256
Vars to TI83 (SEND), 256
Vert (stat plot option), 113
Bar graph, 118
Pictograph, 117
Vertical (draw)
from Graph screen, 191
from Home screen, 192
Volt probe, 265
Y4, 167
YFact, 186
Volume (units), 69
y-intercept (b), 140, 142
Ylist, 112
–W–
Ymax, 171
DATA LOGGER, 271
DATA LOGGER, 271
web site, TI, 262
WeightàMass (units), 69
While, 232
window format, 171
WINDOW values, 171
defining, 173
WINDOW Values Screen, 174
–X–
–Z–
x1 (summary point), 136
x2 (summary point), 136
x3 (summary point), 136
XFact, 186
ZBox, 182, 310
ZDecimal, 310
ZInteger, 311
zoom
Xlist, 112
function graph, 181
ZOOM (() menu, 181
ZoomFit, 312
ZoomIn, 183, 311
SetFactors, 186
ZoomOut, 183, 312
SetFactors, 186
Histogram, 121
Modified Box plot, 124
Scatter plot, 114
xyLine plot, 114
Xmax, 171, 179
356 Index
–Z–(continued)
ZoomStat, 114, 313
ZPrevious, 185
ZQuadrantI, 313
ZSquare, 313
ZStandard, 184, 314
ZTrig, 314
|
Weil McLain EGH Series 4 User Manual
Victor 1210 3A User Manual
Toshiba MA 215 User Manual
Sony HANDYCAM HDR FX1000E User Manual
Sony DCR TRV285E User Manual
Sony Cyber shot DSC W330 User Manual
Sony CFD 121 User Manual
Sony CCD TR2300E User Manual
Sharp XE A206 User Manual
Samsung SMX F43RN User Manual